Philips 1VMN30256A User Manual
FR Manuel dâÂÂUtilisation EN User Manual ES Manual del Usuario EN: For fur ther assistance, call the customer suppor t ser vice in y our countr y . ⢠T o obtain assistance in the U.S.A., Canada, Puer to Rico, or the U.S. Vir gin Islands, contact Philips Customer Care Center at 1-866-309-0866 ⢠T o obtain assistance in Mexico, contact Philips Customer Care Center at 01 800 504 62 00 ES: Para obtener más información, llame al ser vicio de sopor te al cliente de su paÃÂs. ⢠Para obtener asistencia en los Estados Unidos, en Canadá, Puer to Rico o en las Islas VÃÂr genes de los Estados Unidos, comunÃÂquese con Centro de atención al cliente de Philips al 1-866-309-0866 ⢠Solo para Mexico CENTRO DE A TENCIÃÂN A CLIENTES LADA. 01 800 504 62 00 Solo Para México. FR: Pour obtenir de lâÂÂaide supplémentaire, communiquez avec le centre de service àla clientèle de votre pays. ⢠Pour obtenir de lâÂÂaide aux ÃÂtats-Unis, au Canada, àPuerto Rico ou aux ÃÂles Vierges américaines, communiquez avec le centre de service àla clientèle Philips au : 1-866-309-0866 ⢠Pour obtenir lâÂÂaide au Mexique, entrez en contact avec le centre de soin de client de Philips à01 800 504 62 00 Register your product and get support at www.philips.com/welcome BDP7520/F7 BDP7520/F8
EN 2 PRECAUTIONS Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable beneîÂÂts listed below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once, or register online at ww w .philips.com/welc ome to ensure: Return your Product Registra tion Car d or register online at ww w .philips.com/w elcome today to get the very most from your purchase. Know these safety symbols CA UTION: T O REDUCE THE RISK OF ELEC TRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO US ER -S ERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CA UTION RISK OF ELEC TRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN *Proof of Pur chase Returning the enclosed card guar- antees that your date of purchase will be on îÂÂle, so no additional paperwork will be required from you to obtain warranty service. *Product Safety NotiîÂÂcation By registering your product, you'll receive notiîÂÂcation - dir ec tly from the manufac turer - in the rare case of a produc t recall or safety defect. *Additional BeneîÂÂts Registering your product guar- antees that youâÂÂll receive all of the privileges to which y ou're entitled, including special money- saving oîÂÂers. Congratulations on y our purchase, and welcome to the âÂÂfamily!â Dear PHILIPS product owner: Thank you for your conîÂÂdence in PHILIPS. Y ouâÂÂve selected one of the best-built, best- backed produc ts available today . W e âÂÂll do everything in our power to keep you happy with your purchase for many years to come. As a member of the PHILIPS âÂÂfamily , â you âÂÂre entitled to protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industr y. Whatâ s more, your purchase guarantees youâÂÂll receiv e all the information and special oîÂÂers for which you qualify , plus easy access to accessories from our convenient home shopping net work. Most impor tantly , you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction. All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks for investing in a PHILIPS product. P .S. T o get the most from y our PHILIPS purchase , be sure to complete and return your Product Registra tion Card at once, or register online at: ww w .philips.com/w elcome F or Customer Use Please write the model and serial number of your unit (located on the cabinet) in the space below for future reference. Model No. _______________________________________ Serial No. _______________________________________ Visit our World Wide W eb Site at http://w w w .philips.com/w elcome The symbol for CLASS ll (Double Insulation) This âÂÂbolt of lightningâ indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. The âÂÂexclamation pointâ calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING : To reduce the risk of îÂÂre or electric shock, this apparatus should not be exposed to rain or moisture, and objects îÂÂlled with liquids, such as vases, should not be placed on this apparatus. : N O I T U A C T o prevent electric shock , match wide blade of . t r e s n i y l l u f , t o l s e d i w o t g u l p : N O I T N E T T A Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la îÂÂche dans la borne c orrespondante de . d n o f u a â u q s u j r e s s u o p t e e s i r p a l The important note and rating are located on the rear or bottom of the cabinet.
3 PRECAUTIONS EN EN FCC WARNING This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modiîÂÂcations are expressly approved in the manual. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modiîÂÂcation is made. RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment oî and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diîÂÂerent from that to which the receiver is connected. 4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Disconnect the mains plug to shut oî when îÂÂnd trouble or not in use. The mains plug shall remain readily operable. IMPORT ANT SAFETY INSTRUC TIONS 1. Read these instructions. 2. Keep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follow all instructions. 5. Do not use this apparatus near water. 6. Clean only with dry cloth. 7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturerâÂÂs instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including ampliîÂÂers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not îÂÂt into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories speciîÂÂed by the manufacturer. 12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table speciîÂÂed by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14. Refer all servicing to qualiîÂÂed service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. WARNING: Batteries (Battery pack or battery installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, îÂÂre, or the like. LASER SAFETY This apparatus employs a laser. Only a qualiîÂÂed service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this apparatus, due to possible eye injury. CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those speciîÂÂed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CAUTION: Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam. LOCATION: Inside, near the BD mechanism. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
4 PRECAUTIONS EN Do not place the unit on the furniture that is capable of being tilted by a child and an adult leaning, pulling, standing or climbing on it. A falling unit can cause serious injury or even death. To Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire Do not handle the AC power cord with wet hands. Do not pull on the AC power cord when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug. Do not put your îÂÂngers or objects into the unit. Location and Handling Do not install the unit in direct sunlight, near strong magnetic îÂÂelds, or in a place subject to dust or strong vibration. Avoid a place with drastic temperature changes. Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top or bottom of the unit. Depending on your external devices, noise or disturbance of the picture and/or sound may be generated if the unit is placed too close to them. In this case, please ensure enough space between the external devices and the unit. Depending on the environment, the temperature of this unit may increase slightly. This is not a malfunction. Be sure to remove the disc and unplug the AC power cord from the outlet before carrying the unit. Dew Condensation Warning Dew condensation may form inside the unit in the following conditions. If so, do not use this unit at least for a few hours until its inside gets dry. - The unit is moved from a cold place to a warm place. - Under conditions of high humidity. - After heating a cold room. Notice for Progressive Scan Output Consumers should note that not all high deîÂÂnition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 525(480) progressive scan output, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the âÂÂstandard deîÂÂnitionâ output. If there are questions regarding your TV set compatibility with this 525p(480p) BD / DVD player, please contact our customer service center. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠IMPORTANT COPYRIGHT INFORMATION Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited. This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited. ENERGY STAR î is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy eîÂÂcient products and practices.
5 PRECAUTIONS EN EN ⢠Please refer to r elevant topics on â T ROUBLESHOOTINGâ on page 64 before returning the product. ⢠If you need to call a customer service representative, please know the model numbe r and serial number of your product befor e you call. This inf ormation is displayed on the back of the product. Also , please take a moment to identify the problem you are ha ving, and be prepared to explain this to the repr esentative. If you believe the repr esentative will need to help you with operations, please stay near the product. Our representatives will be happy to assist you. F or onlin e refer ence, please visit our w eb site at http://www.philips.c om/welcome ⢠Wipe the front panel and other ex terior sur faces of the unit with a soft cloth. ⢠Never use a solvent, thinner , benzene or alcohol to clean the unit. Do not spra y insect icide liqui d near the unit. Such chemicals may discolor the surface or damage the unit. ⢠When a disc becomes dir ty, clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc fr om the center to out. Do not wipe in a circular motion. ⢠Do not use solvents such as benzine , thinner , commercially available cleaners, deter gent, abrasive cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended for analog records. ⢠I f this uni t still does not pe r form properl y although you refer to the rel evant sec tions and to â TROUBLESHOOTING â in this user ma nual, the lase r optical pi ckup unit may be dirt y . Consult your dealer or an A uthorized Service Center for inspection and cle aning of the laser optical pickup unit. ⢠Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not adhere to the surfaces of the discs. ⢠Always store the disc in its prot ec tive case when it is not used. ⢠Note that discs with special shapes (hear t-shaped discs, octagonal discs, etc.) cannot be played back on this unit. Do not attempt to play such d iscs, as they may damage the unit. 2010 é Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. All rights reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. or their resp ective owners. Philips reserves the right to change product s at any time without being obliged to adjust earlie r supplies accordingly. The material in this manual is believed adequate for the intended use of the system. If the product, or its individual modules or proc edures, are us ed for purposes other than those specified herein, confirmation of their validity and suitability must be obtained . Philips warrants that the material itself does not infringe any United States patents. No further warranty is expressed or implied. Philips cannot be held responsible neither for any errors in the content of this document nor for any problems as a result of the content in this document. Errors reported to Philips will be adapted and pub lished on the Philips support website as soon as possible. No components are user serviceable. Do not open or remove covers to the inside of the product. Repairs may only be done by Philips Service Centers and official repai r shops. Failure to do so shall void any warranty, stated or implied. Any operation expressly prohib ited in this manual, any adjustments, or assembly procedures not recommended or authorized in this manual shall void the warranty. Maintenance Servicing Cleaning the Cabinet Cleaning Discs Cleaning the Disc Lens Disc Handling Notice Warranty Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
6 PRECAUTIONS EN Registering your model with Ph ilips makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed below, so donâÂÂt miss out. Complete and return your Prod uct Registration Card at once, or register online at www.philips.com/welcome to ensure : Proof of Purchase Returning the enclosed card gu arantees that your date of purchase is on file, so no additional paperwork is require d from you to obtain warranty service. Product Safety Notification By regist ering your pr oduct you receive notification - directly from the manufacturer - in the rare case of a product recall or safety defect. Additional Benefits of Product Ownership Registering your product guarantees that you receive all of the privileges to which youâÂÂre entitled, including special money-saving offers. For further as sistance For further assistance, call the customer support service in your country. ⢠T o obtain assistance in the U.S.A., Canada, Puerto Rico, or the U.S . Virgin Islands, contact Philips Customer Care Center at 1-866-309-0866 The packaging of this product is intended to be recycled. Contact your lo cal authorities for information about how to recycle the packaging. End of life directives Philips pays a lot of at tention to produce environment- friendly products in green focal areas. Your new Blu-ray Disc Player contains materia ls which can be recycled and reused. At the end of its life, specialized companies can dismantle the discarded Blu - ray Disc Player to concentrate the reusable materials and to minimize the amount of materials to be disposed of. Please ensure you dispose of your old Blu-ray Disc Player according to local regulations. Disposal of used batteries The bat teries supp lied do not contain the heavy metals mercury and cadmium. Nevertheless, in many areas batteries may not be disposed of with your house hold waste. Please ensure you dispose of batteries accordi ng to local regulations. ⢠Remote Control ⢠Batteries (AAA, 1.5V x 2) â¢U s e r M a n u a l â¢Q u i c k S t a r t G u i d e ⢠Quick Set-up for Philips Wireless MediaConnect ⢠Registration card â¢B o x - i n s e r t s ⢠RCA audio / video cab les Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS- HD Master Audio | Essential and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includ es software. é DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimed ia Interface are trad emarks or registered tr ademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other c ountries. Important Environmental Care Supplied Accessories Trademark Information
7 PRECAUTIONS EN EN âÂÂx.v.Colorâ and âÂÂx.v.Colorâ logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation. Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DivXî, DivX Certifiedî and associated logos are re gistered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. âÂÂAVCHDâ and the âÂÂAVCHDâ logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. âÂÂBONUSVIEWâ is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. âÂÂBD-Liveâ and âÂÂBD-Liveâ logo are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. DLNAî, the DL NA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDî are trademarks, service marks, o r certification marks of the Digital Liv ing Network Alliance. Netflix and the Netflix logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Netflix, Inc. BLOCKBUSTER name, design and related marks are trademarks of Blockbuster Inc. VUDU⢠is a trademark of VUDU, Inc. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. é 2010 Sonic Soluti ons. Roxio, CinemaNow, Roxio CinemaNow and the Roxio CinemaNow logos are trademarks or registere d trademarks ow ned by Sonic Solution s in the United States and other jurisdictions. âÂÂBlu-ray 3Dâ and âÂÂBlu-ray 3Dâ logo are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. âÂÂBlu-ray DiscâÂÂ, âÂÂBlu-rayâ and âÂÂBlu-ray Discâ logo are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. Kodak and KODAK Picture CD Compatible are trademarks of Kodak used under license. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
EN 8 CONTENTS Introduction Precautions ................................................................... 2 Maintenance ...............................................................................5 Notice ............................................................................................5 Important .....................................................................................6 Supplied Accessories ...............................................................6 Trademark Information ...........................................................6 Features ........................................................................ 9 Features ........................................................................................9 Product Info .............................................................................. 10 Symbols Used in this User Manual .... ............................... 10 Functional Overview .................................................. 11 Front Panel ................................................................................ 11 Rear Panel .................................................................................. 11 Remote Control ........................................ ............................... 12 Front Panel Display ................................. ............................... 14 Guide to On-Screen Display ............................................... 15 Connections Connections ................................................................ 16 Connection to the TV ............................................................ 16 Connection to an Audio System ........ ............................... 19 Connection to the Network ................................................ 20 Basic Setup Before You Start ......................................................... 22 Finding the Viewing Channel on Your TV ..................... 22 Playback Information on Playback ........................................... 23 Information on Playback ...................................................... 23 Guide to File List ..................................................................... 25 How to Insert a Disc ............................................................... 25 Basic Playback ............................................................ 26 Playing Back a BD, DVD or a Disc with AVCHD Files ....... . 26 Playing Back an Audio CD or a Disc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Files .................. 27 Playing Back a Blu-ray 3D Disc ........................................... 29 KODAK Picture CD .................................................................. 29 Reading the SD Memory Card ........................................... 30 Playing Video / Mus ic / Photo Files from DLNA Certified Home Media Servers ............ ............................... 31 About DivXî and DivXî VOD .............................................. 32 Playing Back DivXî with DivX î External Subtitle ........ 33 Using the Title / Disc Menu .................. ............................... 33 Special Playback ......................................................... 34 Fast Forward / Fast Reverse ................................................ 34 Slow Forward Playback ........................................................ 34 Step by Step Playback .......................................................... 34 Zoom ........................................................................................... 34 Repeat Playback ....................................... ............................... 35 A-B Repeat ................................................................................ 35 Slide Show ................................................................................. 35 PiP (BONUSVIEW) Setting .................................................... 36 Enjoying BD-Live Discs with Internet .............................. 36 Title / Chapter Search ........................................................... 37 Track Search .............................................. ............................... 37 Time Search .............................................................................. 37 Switching Subtitles ................................. ............................... 38 Switching Audio Soundtrack ............................................. 38 Switching Camera Angles ................................................... 39 Philips Wireless MediaConnect .......... ............................... 39 Netflix Operations ................................................ ..... 40 Before Activating the Connection to Netflix ................. 40 Activating the Connection to Netflix ...............................40 Watching Streaming Movies ...............................................40 CinemaNow / Blockbuster Operations ..................... 41 Before Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster ...............................................................................41 Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster ...............................................................................41 Guide to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Menu Screen .....41 Renting or Purchasing Movies / TV episodes ................42 Searching Movies / TV episodes ........... .............................42 Watching Rented or Purchased Movies / TV episodes ..... . 42 VUDU Operations ....................................................... 43 Activating VUDU .....................................................................43 Guide to VUDU Menu Screen ................ .............................43 Renting or Purchasing VUDU Movies ..............................44 Watching Rented or Purchased VUDU movies ............44 Using Internet Applications ................................................44 Function Setup List of settings ............................................................ 45 Setups ......................................................................... 52 TV Shape .....................................................................................52 HDMI Video Resolution .........................................................52 HDMI Audio ...............................................................................53 Digital Out .................................................................................55 Ratings Lock ..............................................................................56 Network Connection .............................................................57 EasyLink (HDMI CEC) ................................. .............................62 Software Upgrade ...................................................................62 Reset to Factory Default .......................... .............................63 Others Troubleshooting ........................................................ 64 Downloading an Electronic Copy .....................................66 Contact Us .................................................................................66 Glossary ...................................................................... 67 Specifications ............................................................. 69 Network Service Disclaimer ...................................... 70 IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D TELEVISIONS ................................................. 71 ONE (1) YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY .......................... 72
9 EN EN FEATURES Congratulations on your purchase, and welcome to Philips! To fully benefit from the support that Philips offers, register your product at www.philips.com/welcome . Blu-ray Disc You can enjoy Blu-ray Disc wh ich is capable of storing five times more data than a conventional DVD. Playing back Blu-r ay 3D Disc This unit can play back Blu-ray 3D D iscs which contain stereoscopic 3D video. In order to enjoy 3D video, c onnect this unit to a 3D capable TV using an HDMI 1.4 cable. BD-Jav a With some BDs which support Java applications, you c an enjoy the interactive functions such as g ames or interactive menus. DVD upscaling for enhanced picture quality Your current DVD will look even better than before thanks to video upscaling. Upscaling will increase the resolution of standard definition DVD to high definition up to 1080p over an HDMI connection. The picture will be less jagged and mor e realistic for a near high definition experience. Enjoy your content on different kinds of media Full backwards compa tibility with DVD, CD and SD card ensures that you can continue to enj oy your current audio- video collection. Additionally, you can enjoy AVCHD / DivXî / MP3 / WMA / JPEG files. Listen to rich multi-channel surround so und Multi-channel surround sound, which realizes real-to-life sound and makes you feel th at you are really there. Intuitive user interface and re mote control The Philips logical user interface allows you to easily navigate through your content and settings, so you can quickly find what you are looking for. Easy and simple connection to your HDTV via HDMI Connect your BDP7520 to your HDTV with one single HDMI (High Definition Mu ltimedia Interface) cable. Philips recommends HDMI1.4 (category 2) cable (also known as High Speed HDMI cable) for better comp atibility. The hig h definition video output signal will be tr ansferred to your HDTV without conversion to analog signals, so you will get excellent picture and sound quality, completely free from noise. Thanks to other multiple outputs, yo u can also easily connect to your home theater system or amplifier. About EasyLi nk (HDMI CEC) (Consumer Electronics Control) EasyLink (HDMI CEC) allows you to operate the linked functions of this player with Philips brand TV with EasyLink feature. Philips does not guarantee 100 % interoperability with other brands of HDMI CEC compliant devices. PiP (BONUSVIEW) Some BD-videos have the PiP function which enables you to display the secondary video in th e primary video. You can call up the secondary video by pressing [BONUSVIEW (PiP)] whenever the scene contai ns the secondary video. BD-Live BD-Live (BD-ROM version 2 Profile 2.0) th at allows interactive functions to be used when th is unit is connected to the Internet in addition to the BONUSVIEW function. Th e various functions differ depending on the disc. Pop-up menu Some BD-videos have a pop-up menu w hich is a navigation menu th at ca n be ca lled u p and be operated on the TV screen without interrupting playback. You can call up the pop-up menu by pressing [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] . Contents in the pop-up menu vary dependin g on the disc. HDMI Deep Color Deep Color reduces posterizat ion effect of the playback image. Refer to âÂÂHDMI Deep Colo râ in the âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGSâ on page 46. HDMI 1080p/24 o utput (BD only) This unit is equipped with the feature which can provid e smooth movement du ring playback o f film origin ated materi al with the frame rate of 24 frames per second with progressive. (Av ailable only when the dis play device is co nnected by an HDMI cable.) Refer to âÂÂHDMI 1080p/24â in the âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGSâ on page 46 . Playing back contents fro m an SD Memory Card You can play back AVCHD / DivXî / MP3 / WMA / JPEGs store d in an SD Memory Card. BD-ROM Profile 2.0 (BD-Live) and Profile 1.1 discs sometimes s tore picture-in-picture commentary, subtitles or other extras in the SD Memory Card for use during playback with the BD-video. Playing back AVCHD files This unit supp orts pla ybac k of AVCHD form at file s (ne w form at for high defin ition video camcord ers) recorded on disc / SD card. Your high definition per sonal archive is playable in HD quality. x.v.Color This unit supports playback of video contents on discs recorded with âÂÂx.v.Colorâ tech nology. To watch this video content with the âÂÂx.v.Colorâ sp ace, a TV or other display device s upporting both video image repr oduction using âÂÂx.v.Colorâ standard and capabili ty of manual switching of its color space setting is required. Pl ease refer to the user manual of your displa y device for further info rmation. Features Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
10 FEATURES EN Enjoy contents stored on DLNA certified home media servers This unit is a DLNA certifie d media player that can pl ay video, music and photo files stored on DLNA ce rtified home media servers connected to your home network. Netflix With this unit, you can enjoy movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from Netflix vi a the Internet. In order t o use this feature, you must visit netf lix.com/Philips on your PC and become a Netflix member. (This feature is available on ly in the United States. ) CinemaNow / Blockbuster With this unit, you can enjoy movies and TV epi sodes streamed instantly from CinemaNow / Bl ockbuster via the Internet. In order to use this feature, yo u must visit following website on your PC and become a CinemaNow / Blockbus ter member. - C inemaNow : www.cinemanow.com/Login - Blockbuster : www.blockbus ter.com/auth/login VUDU This unit supports VUDU which is th e leading HD on-demand video service. With VUDU, you ca n also enjoy various kinds of Internet applications. In order to use this feature, you must connect this unit to the Internet. âÂÂProduct Infoâ screen provides information about this unitâÂÂs hardware and software version. You can also download the latest software from the Philips web site and upgrade it yourself if it is newer than the version currently on your unit. The current version of software on your unit can be seen on the âÂÂProduct I nfoâ screen. To access âÂÂProduct InfoâÂÂ, follow the procedure below. 1) Press [ (home)]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂOthersâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂProduct InfoâÂÂ, then press [OK]. To specify which media type each function is ap plicable to, we put the following symbols at th e beginning of each item to operate. If you do not find any of the symb ols listed above under the function heading, the operation is appl icable to all media. Product Info Symbols Used in this User Manual Symbol Description Description refers to BD-video Description refers to DVD-video Description refers to audio CD / DTS-CD Description refers to DVD-RW/-R and SD card with AVCHD files Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with DivXî files Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with MP3 files Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with Windows Media⢠Audio f iles Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with JPEG files Description refers to video files in the DLNA home server Description refers to music files in the DLNA home server Description refers to photo files in the DLNA home server
11 EN EN FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Q (standby/on) button ⢠Press to turn on the unit, or t o turn the unit into the standby mode. (To completely turn off the unit, you must unplug the AC power co rd.) ⢠Press and hold for 10 seconds to shut do wn the unit. ⢠This button lights up in red when the unit is in standby mode and turns off when the power is on. 2. C (stop) button ⢠Press to stop playback. 3. F (pause) button ⢠Press to pause playback. 4. B (play) button ⢠Press to start or resume playback. 5. A (open/close) button ⢠Press to open or close the disc tray. 6. Disc tray ⢠Place a disc after opening the disc tray. 7. Display ⢠Refer to âÂÂFront Panel Displayâ on page 14. 8. Infrared sensor window ⢠Receive signals from your remote control so that you can control the unit from a distance. 9. SD card slot ⢠Insert an SD Memory Card and p lay back the contents in it. 1. HDMI OUT jack ⢠Use to connect to a displa y with an HDMI compatible port with an HDMI cable. 2. LAN terminal ⢠Use to connect to network provisioning equipment such as a router or a modem with a LAN cable. 3. AUDIO OUT jacks ⢠Use to connect a TV monitor, an AV receiver / amplifier or other device with an RCA audio cable. 4. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks ⢠Use to connect a TV monitor with component video inputs with an RCA component video cable. 5. AC power cord ⢠Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit. ⢠Unplug this cord from the AC outlet to complet ely turn off the unit. 6. Wireless LAN (Internal) 7. DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack ⢠Use to connect an AV receiver / amplifier, Dolby Digital / DTS decoder or other device with a di gital audio coaxial input jack with a digital audio coaxial cable. 8. VIDEO OUT jack ⢠Use to connect a TV monitor, an AV receiver / amplifier or other device with an RCA video cable. Front Panel 2 1 4 5 7 6 8 9 3 Note ⢠Due to new ENERGY ST ARî requiremen ts, this unit will automatically enter stand by mode after 25 minutes of inactivity. Rear Panel DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT 2 1 7 6 3 8 4 5 Note ⢠Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel. Electrosta tic discharge may cause permanen t damage to the unit. ⢠This unit does not have the R F modulator . ⢠Do not try to rip the internal W ireless LAN from the unit. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
12 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN * The unit can also be turned on by pressing these buttons. 1. Q (standby/on) button ⢠Press to turn on the unit, or t o turn the unit into the standby mode. (To completely turn off the unit, you must unplug the AC power co rd.) 2. BONUSVIEW (PiP) button ⢠Press to switch picture in picture feat ure on/off (only applicable to BD-vid eo which supports the PiP (BONUSVIEW) function). 3. ZOOM button ⢠Press to enlarge the picture on the TV screen. 4. Red / Green / Blue / Yellow button ⢠Press to activate short cut keys on some BD-video function. ⢠When file list / setup list is shown, press to sw itch between pages. 5. (home) button ⢠Press to display the home menu. 6. DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU button BD: ⢠Press to display the pop-up menu. DVD: ⢠Press to display the disc menu. 7. K / L / s / B buttons ⢠Press to select items or settings. 8. OK button ⢠Press to confirm or select menu items. 9. BACK U button ⢠Press to return to the previously displayed menu or screen function. 10. B (pl ay) button* ⢠Press to start playback or resume playback. 11. S (previous) button ⢠During playback, press once to return to the beginning of the current title, chapter, track or file. ⢠During playback, press twice to return to the previous title, chapter, track o r file. ⢠During the JPEG playbac k, press to return to the previous file. 12. E (reverse) button ⢠During playback, press to fast reverse the playback. 13. C (stop) button ⢠Press to stop playback. 14. TV VOL ⴠ/ ⴠbutton ⢠Press to adjust the TV volu me. (Applicable to Philips TVs with Easy Link or some other devices with H DMI CEC. EasyLink has to be enabled in both devices for this function to work.) 15. A (open/close) button* ⢠Press to open or close the disc tray. 16. Number buttons ⢠Press to select a chapter during playback. ⢠Press to enter values in the input field. 17. SUBTITLE button ⢠Press to select subtitles on a disc. 18. ANGLE button ⢠Press to select camera angles on a disc. ⢠Press to rotate a picture ( JPEG). 19. HDMI button ⢠Press to set the HDMI output mode. 20. AUDIO button ⢠Press to select the audio channel (such as audio languages) on a disc. 21. TV CH ⴠ/ ⴠbutton ⢠Press to change the channel up and down. (Applicable to Philips TVs with EasyLink or some other devices with HDMI CEC. EasyL ink has to be enabled in both devices for this function to work.) 22. d (mute) button ⢠Press to mute the TV volume. (Applicable to Philips TVs with Easy Link or some other devices with H DMI CEC. EasyLink has to be enabled in both devices for this function to work.) 23. D (forward) button ⢠During playback, press to fast forward the playback. ⢠When playback is in pause, press to slow forward the playback. 24. T (next) button ⢠During playback, press to skip to the next chapter, track or file. 25. F (pause) button ⢠Press to pause playback. ⢠When playback is in pause mode, press repeatedly to forward the playback step by step. 26. INFO button ⢠Press to display the information display. 27. TOP MENU button BD: ⢠Press to display the top menu. DVD: ⢠Press to display the title menu. 28. REPEAT A-B button ⢠Press to play back a defined section between point A and B repeatedly. 29. REPEAT button ⢠Press to toggle between various repeat modes. Remote Control 1 2 5 6 7 9 11 10* 12 13 14 16 17 18 4 3 8 15* 29 28 27 26 24 21 20 19 23 22 25
13 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN EN Install 2 AAA (1.5V) batteries matching the polarity indicated inside battery compart ment of the remote control. Remote Control Usage Guidelines: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote control and the infrared sensor window on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unre liable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the infrared sensor window of the unit. ⢠Remote control for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remote control for other device located close to the unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote control. ⢠The maximum operable ranges from the unit are as follows. - Line of sight: approx. 23 feet (7 m) - Either side of the center: approx. 16 feet (5 m) within 30ð -A b o v e : approx. 16 feet (5 m) within 15ð -B e l o w : approx. 10 feet (3 m) within 30ð Installing the Batteries in the Remote Control 1) Open the cover. 2) Insert batteries. Make sure to match and - on the batteries t o the marks indicated in the batt ery compartment. 3) Close the cover. Note Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Plea se observe the following: ⢠Do not mix new and old batt eries together . ⢠Do not use diff erent kinds of batteries to gether . Although they may look similar , different batteries may hav e different v oltages. ⢠Make sure that the and - ends of each battery match the indications in the batter y compar tment. ⢠Remove ba tteries from batt er y compar tment that is not going to be used for a m onth or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâ s rules th at apply in your country or area. ⢠Do not recharge , shor t- circuit, heat, burn or disassemble batteries. Using a Remote Control 30à30à16 feet (5 m) 23 feet (7 m) 16 feet (5 m) Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
14 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN 1. Displays repeat icon. (Appears during repeat playback.) 2. Displays media mode icon (d isc mode or SD card mode). 3. Displays playback status ic on. Refer to the table below. 4. Displays information such as title number, el apsed playing time, repeat type, menu type, etc. e.g.) Front Panel Display 1 2 3 4 * Brightness of the display can be adju sted. Refer to âÂÂFront Pane l Brightnessâ in âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGS â on page 50. Playback status icon Mode Playback is in progress Stop mode Pause mode Fast forward mode Fast reverse mode Slow forward mode Loading Disc is being played back. Indicating the current title number and the elapsed time. Current chapter is in chapter repeat mode during playback of disc. Loading a disc. Dolby Digital audio is being played back during playback of disc. DTS audio is being played back during playback of disc. Home menu is displayed and the unit is in disc mode. Loading VUDU.
15 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN EN When you turn on the unit, home menu wil l appear automatically. Otherwise, press [( h o m e ) ] . 1. Directory Displays the current hierarchy. 2. Menus 3. Options Displays options for the highli ghted item on the left whenever available. Guide to On-Screen Display Home Menu âÂÂPlay Discâ : I nitiates playback of inserted disc, displays a list of tracks / files or the media filter menu âÂÂSD Cardâ : D isplays a list of tracks / files on the inserted SD card or the media filter menu âÂÂHome Networkâ : Displays a list of avai lable DLNA media servers discover ed on the connected network âÂÂSettingsâ : T o access settings menus âÂÂMediaConnect â : To access the Philips Wireless MediaConnect menu âÂÂNETFLIXâ : L aunches the Netflix applica tion âÂÂvuduâ : Launches the VUDU App Home screen âÂÂBLOCKBUSTERâ : Launches the Blo ckbuster application âÂÂCinemaNowâ : Launches the CinemaNow application Menu Screen Blu-ray Disc Pla yer Play Disc SD Card Home Networ k Settings BD-Player Settings 3 D Output Language Video Output Audio Ratings Lock Network Connection Others Factory Default Auto (xx) 3D 2D 2 3 1 Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
EN 16 CONNECTIONS (Supports up to 1080i (*1) , 1080p (*2) , 1080p/24 reso lution.) (*1) 1080i : Outputs the video data with frame rate of 30 frames per second. (*2) 1080p : Outputs the video data with fr ame rate of 6 0 frames per second. (Supports up to 1080i resolution.) (Supports only 480i resolution. ) ⢠Connect this unit dire c tly to the T V . If the RCA audio / vi deo cables are connected to a VCR, pictures may be distorted due to the copy right protection system. Connection to the TV 1 Choose the ap propriat e connection , then proceed to the corresponding instruction (A, B or C) on the next page. Best HDMI IN A Video Audio HDMI cable Your TV No analog audio connection required. Go To No supplied cables are used in this connection: ⢠Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store. Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo (a cer tified HDMI cable) for this connection. High Speed HDMI cable (also k nown as HDMI categor y 2 cable) is recommended for better compatibility . ⢠T o enjoy 3D Blu-ra y video, connect this unit to a 3D capable T V using an HDMI 1.4 cable . Better B COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y P B/C B P R/C R AUDIO IN R L Video Audio RCA component video cable Your TV Go To RCA audio cable Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows: ⢠RCA audio cabl e (L/R) x 1 Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store. Basic C AUDIO IN R L VIDEO IN Video Audio RCA video cable Your TV Go To RCA audio cable Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows: ⢠RCA audio cabl e (L/R) x1 ⢠RCA video cable x1
17 CONNECTIONS EN EN HDMI Video / Audio Connection Component Video Standard Audio Connection Standard Video Stan dard Audio Connection 2 Connect the cables by followi ng the descriptions b elow. DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN A HDMI IN ($-)îÂÂ/54 HDMI OUT HDMI cable Your TV L Y P R /C R P B /C B R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT B COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y PR/CR PB/CB AUDIO IN R L DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P B / C B R VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L Y P R / C R RCA component video cable Your TV RCA audio cable DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L C AUDIO IN R L L R AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN Your TV RCA video cable RCA audio cable Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Se tup
18 CONNECTIONS EN Press [HDMI] to change the resolution of the video signal being output from the HDMI OUT jack. The video resolution changes as follows every time [HDMI] is pressed. Or change the setting in th e âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ in the settings menu. HDMI Mode and Actual Output Signals Font Panel Display HD MI Video Resolution 480 Progressive Press [HDMI] 720 Progressive Press [HDMI] 1080 Interlaced Press [HDMI] 1080 Progress ive Press [HDMI] Copyright protection system To play back the digita l video images of a BD-video or DVD-vi deo via an HDMI connection, it is necessary that both the player and the display device (or an AV receiver / amplifie r) support a copyright protection system called HDCP (high- bandwidth digital content protection system). HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP. Please read the operating instructions of your display device (or AV receiver / amplifier) for more information. Note ⢠When connected to an HDCP incompatible display device, the picture will not be displayed properly . ⢠The audio signals fr om the HDMI jack (including the samp ling frequency , the number of channels and bit length) may be limited by the device that is connec ted. ⢠Among the displa y device(s) that support HDMI, some do no t suppor t audio output (for example, projectors). While connected to a device such as a projector , audi o will not be output from the HDMI OUT jack . ⢠When this unitâ s HDMI jack is connected to a DVI-D comp a tible display device(s) (HD CP compatible) with an HDMI- DVI conv er ter cable, the signals are output in digital RGB. â¢P r e s s i n g [HDMI] does not work when HDMI cable is not connected, or when no video signal is being output fr om the HDMI OUT jack. â¢P r e s s i n g [HDMI] does not work during the playback of a BD-video. ⢠When you make a selection, the T V monitor temporarily goes blank and then comes back again. I f it does not, press [HDMI] repeatedly to change the resolution or press and hold [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its default.
19 CONNECTIONS EN EN ⢠When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off . ⢠Refer to the manual accompan ying ex ternal devices for more inf ormation. Audio Output from Analog Out (2ch Jacks) *1) Full decoded. *2) Only the independent substream is decoded. *3) Dolby TrueHD stream is decoded. *4) Only the Dolby Digital subst ream is decoded. *5) Only the core substream is decoded. Connection to an Audio System 2-Channel Analog Audio Connecti on Digital Audio Connection DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT L R AUDIO OUT P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM A UDIO IN L R L R A UDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT PCM / BITSTREAM COAXIAL COAXIAL DIGIT AL AUDIO INPUT audio AUDIO OUT analog audio input jacks RCA audio cable stereo system this unit digital audio coaxial input jack digital audio RCA cable DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) AV receiver / amplifier To set up âÂÂDigital OutâÂÂ, refer to page 55. âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setting A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Media ê Audio Source ê BD-video Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM Dolby Digital Plus DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch P CM *2 Dolby TrueHD DownMix 2ch PCM *3 DownMix 2ch P CM *4 DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DTS-HDî DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch P CM *5 LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DVD-video Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM 2ch PCM DTS-CD DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM AVCHD Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DivXî Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP3 / MP2 2ch PCM Audio CD PCM 2ch PCM MP3 MP3 2ch PCM Windows Media⢠Audio WMA 2ch PCM DLNA Video Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP2 2ch PCM LPCM 2ch PCM DLNA Music MP3 / WMA / LPCM 2ch PCM Netflix WMA 2ch PCM Cinema Now AAC 2ch PCM Blockbuster AAC 2ch PCM VUDU Dolby Digital Plus DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch P CM *2 MP3 2ch PCM Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Se tup
20 CONNECTIONS EN To set up âÂÂHDMI AudioâÂÂ, refer to page 53. By connecting this unit to the Internet , you can upgrade the software via the In ternet, play contents stored on DLNA home media servers or access BD-Live, Netfli x, CinemaNow, Blockbuster and VUDU services. - For more information about software upgrad e, refer to âÂÂNetwork Upgradeâ on page 62. - For more information about DLNA, refer to âÂÂPlaying Vide o / Music / Photo Files from DLNA Certified Home Media Serversâ on page 31. - For more information about BD-Live, refer to âÂÂE njoying BD-Live Discs with Internetâ on page 36. - For more information about Netflix, re fer to âÂÂNETFLIX OPERATIONSâ on page 40. - For more informa tion about CinemaNow and Blockbuster, refer to âÂÂCIN EMANOW / BLOCKBUSTER OPERATIONSâ on page 41. - For more information about VUDU, re fer to âÂÂVUDU OPERATIONSâ on page 43. Make the following connection if you are using a wired router. HDMI Audio Connection DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI IN audio this unit HDMI cable AV receiver / amplifier with an HDMI input jack Supplied cables used in these connections are as f ollows: ⢠RCA audio cabl e (L/R) x 1 Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store. Connection to the Network Note ⢠Wired connection is rec ommended when using following features . (Using following features wi th wireless connection can be affected by other devices us ing radio frequencies.) - Play contents from DLNA certified home media servers - Video streaming services (Netflix / CinemaNow / Blockbus ter / VUDU) -N e t w o r k u p g r a d e Wired Connection LAN WAN LAN 1 2 3 4 5 LAN DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDI O OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN HDMI OUT LAN this unit Internet LAN cable LAN cable Hub or wired router ADSL / cable modem No supplied cables are used in this connection: Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.
21 CONNECTIONS EN EN Make the following connection if you are using a wireless router. Note ⢠After you made a wired connection, set up necessar y network settings. (For the network setting of wired connection, refer to âÂÂWired Connectionâ on page 57.) ⢠Do not inser t any cable other than a LAN cable t o the LAN terminal to av oid damaging the unit. ⢠If your modem does no t have router functions, connect a wired router . ⢠If your modem has router functions but there is no vacant port, use a hub. ⢠For a wir ed router , use a rout er which sup por ts 10BASE- T / 100BASE- T X. ⢠Do not connect your PC dir ec tly to the LAN terminal of t his unit. ⢠Please purchase shielded LAN cables at your local store and use them when you connect to network equipment. Wireless Connection DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL LAN HDMI OUT Wireless LAN LAN WAN Wireless LAN this unit Internet LAN cable Wireless router ADSL / cable modem No supplied cables are used in this connection: Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store. Note ⢠After you made the wireless connection, set up necessary network settings. (For the network setting of wireless connection, refer to âÂÂWireless Connection â on page 60.) ⢠For a wireless r outer , use a router which supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. (n is recommended for stable operation of the wireless network.) ⢠Set the wireless router to Inf rastructu re mode. This unit does not suppor t Ad-hoc mode. ⢠Other radio devices or obstacles may cause inter ference to the wir eless network connect ion. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Se tup
EN 22 BEFORE YOU START After you have completed all the connectio ns, you must find the viewing channel (external input channel) on your TV. Finding the Viewing Channel on Your TV 1 After you have made all the necessary connections, press [ Q (standby/on)] to turn on the unit. 2 Turn on your TV. 3 Press the button on the TVâÂÂs remote control that accesses the external input channel. It may be labeled âÂÂSOURCEâÂÂ, âÂÂAVâ or âÂÂSELECTâ (refer to your TVâÂÂs user manual). Or press âÂÂ2â on the TVâÂÂs remote control, then press channel down button repeatedly until you see the PHILIPS splash screen. This is the correct viewing channel (external input channel). ⢠If a cer tain amount of time has passed since you turned on the unit, y ou may see the home menu instead of the PHILIPS splash screen. Home menu: Blu-ray Disc Pla yer Play Disc SD Card Home Networ k Settings
23 EN EN INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK Before you start playing back a disc, read the following informa tion. This unit is compatible to p lay back the following discs / files. To play back a disc / file, make sure that it meets the requirements for region codes and color systems as described below. You can play back disc s that have the following logos. Other disc types are not guara nteed to play back. (*) Due to the intent ional progression of the Blu-ray Disc format by its standard setting authority, the company cannot guarantee or warrant the playability of future extensions of the Blu-ray Disc format with this product. ⢠ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivXî is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. T his is an official DivX Cer tified device that plays DivX video . Visit www .divx.com for more information and soft ware tools to convert your files into DivX video. ⢠ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This D ivX Certifiedî device must be registered in or der to play DivX Video- on- Demand ( VOD) content. T o generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vo d.divx.com with this code t o complete the registration proc ess an d learn more about DivX VOD . ⢠DivX Certifiedî to play DivXî video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ⢠Discs containing the DivXî files with the DivXî GMC (Global Motion Compensation) playback feature, which is DivXî supplemental function, cannot be played back on this unit. ⢠This unit cannot play back the disc contents protec ted by Windo ws Media⢠Digital Rights Managemen t (DRM). Information on Playback Playable Discs and Files Playable discs Logos Blu-ray Disc - BD-video - Blu-ray 3D Disc - Blu-ray 3D only Disc - BD-RE* (ver. 2.1) (Recorded in BDMV format) - BD-R* (ver. 1.1 / 1.2 / 1.3) (Recorded in BDMV format) (Unclosed discs may not be played back.) DVD-video DVD-RW (finalized video mode discs only) DVD-R (finalized video mode discs only) CD-DA (audio CD) CD-RW CD-R KODAK Picture CD DTS-CD - Playable files Media AVCHD DVD-RW/-R SD Memory Card (including SDHC) miniSD Card microSD Card DivXî BD-RE/-R DVD-RW/-R CD-RW/-R SD Memory Card (including SDHC) miniSD Card microSD Card MP3 Windows Media⢠Audio JPEG Readable cards Playable files / data SD Memory Card (8 MB - 2 GB) AVCHD, DivXî, MP3 , WMA, JPEG, picture-in-picture commentary, subtitles or other extras for BD-ROM ver. 2 (Profile 2.0 / Profile 1.1) SDHC Memory Card (4 GB - 8 GB) miniSD Card (8 MB - 2 GB) microSD Card (8 MB - 2 GB) Note for SD Memory Car ds ⢠This unit supports SD Memor y Card wit h F A T12 / F A T16 file syst em, and SDHC Memor y Card with F A T32 file syst em. ⢠This unit does not support NTFS file sy stem. ⢠This unit may not read SD Me mor y Cards formatted on a computer . If that is the cas e, please reformat the SD Memor y Cards in this unit and try again . ⢠This unit does not support miniSDHC and microSDHC Memory Card . ⢠For miniSD Card and microSD C ard, an adapter is necessar y . ⢠Portions of this produc t are protected under copyright law and are pro vided under license by ARIS / SOLANA / 4C. ⢠Please keep the SD Memor y Cards in their cases when you are not using them. ⢠Do not tr y to open or modify the card. ⢠Do not touch the terminal sur f ace with your fingers or any metals. ⢠Do not attach additional labels or stickers to cards. ⢠Do not r emove the l abel of the SD Me mor y Car ds. ⢠This unit recog nizes up to 8 characters of file name in the SD Memory Card. Characters af ter 8th will not be display ed. miniSD Card adapter miniSD Card microSD Card microSD Card adapter Introducti on Connections Ba sic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
24 INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK EN The following discs will not be played back in this unit. ⢠BD-RE (ver .1.0) ⢠BD-RE (ver .2.1) (Recorded in BD A V format) ⢠BD-R (ver .1.1 / 1.2 / 1.3) (Recorded in BD A V format) ⢠BD that contains A VCHD files ⢠BD / DVD hybrid disc (pla yed back as a BD-video only) ⢠Super Audio CD - Only the sound on the CD lay er can be heard. The sound on the high-density Super Audio CD layer cannot be hear d. ⢠Playability of dual discs are not guaranteed. BD-video and DVD-video are recorded in different color systems throughout the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which is us ed primarily in the United States and Canada). This unit employs NTSC color system, so the disc you play back must be recorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back the disc record ed in other color systems. The contents of disc are generally divided into sections or folders (groups of titles / files) as shown below . [ ] : group (folder) icon [ ] : group (folder) return icon [ ] : video file icon [ ] : music file icon [ ] : photo file icon [ ] : information icon [ ] : key icon [ ] : signal icon - âÂÂFoldersâ refers to the groups of files. - âÂÂTracksâ refers to the cont ents recorded on the audio CD. - âÂÂFilesâ refers to the contents on a disc which are recorded in DivXî, MP3, Wind ows Media⢠Audi o, JPEG file format. Unplayable Discs and Files ⢠CD-ROM ⢠CD-I (compact disc-interactive) â¢D V D - R A M â¢V S D ( v i d e o s i n g l e d i s c ) â¢D V D - a u d i o â¢v i d e o C D ⢠HD DVD ⢠SVCD ⢠unfinalized disc Color Systems Region Codes This unit has been designed to play back BD-video with region âÂÂAâÂÂ, DVD-video with region âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ1â for BDP7520/F7 (USA / Canada) and region âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ4â for BDP7520/F8 (Mexico). You cannot play back BD-video or DVD-video that are labeled for other regions. Look for the symbols on the right on your BD-video or DVD-video. If these region symbols do not appear on your BD-video or DVD-video, you cannot play back the disc in this unit. The lett er or number inside the globe refers to region of the world. A BD-video or DVD-video labeled for a specific region can only be played back in the unit with the same region code. BD-video DVD-video For BDP7520/F7 (USA / Canada) For BDP7520/F8 (Mexico) Hint for Disc Playback Description for Icons Note ⢠Unrecognizable characters will be replaced by â î âÂÂ. ⢠For BD , DVD and SD card, this unit can recognize up to 999 groups (f olders), and 9,999 tracks / files. ⢠For CD , this unit can recognize up t o 255 groups (folders), and 999 tracks / files . BD-video, DVD-video, AVCHD title 1 title 2 chapter 1 chapter 2 chapter 2 chapter 1 chapter 3 Audio CD track 1 track 2 track 3 track 4 track 5 DivXî, MP3,Windows Med ia⢠Audi o, JP EG folder (group) 1 folder (group) 2 file 1 file 2 file 1 file 2 file 3
25 INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK EN EN 1) Total track number 2) Repeat status 3) Image 4) Elapsed playing time of the current track 5) Playing track number 6) Total time of the current track 7) Playing media 8) Track list 9) Playback status e.g.) MP3 mode 1) Number of contents in the current hierarchy 2) Repeat status (Music mode only) 3) Image 4) Elapsed playing time of the current track 5) Current file name 6) Media type 7) Group (folder) / File list 8) Playback status 9) Root folder 10) Directory 1) Directory 2) Number of contents in the current hierarchy 3) Current file name 4) Group (folder) / File list (thumbnails) 5) Root folder 1) Press [ A (open/close)] to op en the disc tray. 2) Place the disc on the disc tray with its label side facing up. * Make sure the disc is compatible w ith this unit (re fer to page 23 for the li st of compatible discs). 3) Press [ A (open/close)] to cl ose the disc tray. To eject the disc: Press [ A (open/close)] to open the disc tray. Remove the disc. Press [ A (open/close)] to close the disc tray. Guide to File List Audio CD Track List Video / Music Mode File List CDDA 00 : 03 : 40 00 : 00 : 39 14 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 001 BD-Player Music T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack Page Down T rack 7 6 5 4 3 1 9 8 2 MP3_1.mp3 MP3 MP3_3.mp3 00:00:13 MP3_2.mp3 MP3_3.mp3 MP3_4.mp3 MP3_5.mp3 MP3_6.mp3 MP3_7.mp3 9 .. BD-Player Play Disc Music Media Filter Page Down | 1 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Picture Mode File List How to Insert a Disc It may take a while to load the disc. .. 24 BD-Player Play Disc Pictures Media Filter Page Down | 12 4 5 3 Align the disc to the disc tray guide. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
EN 26 BASIC PLAYBACK Playing Back a BD, DVD or a Disc with AVCHD Files 1 In s e r t a d i s c ( r e f e r t o â H o w t o I n s e r t a Discâ on page 25). 2 Playback may start automatically. If not, press [ B (play)] . Some discs may show a title or a disc menu. In this case, refer to âÂÂUsing the Title / Disc Menuâ on page 33. To pause playback: Press [ F (pause)] . To return to the normal playback: Press [ B (pl ay)] . To stop playback: Press [ C (stop)] . Playback will be in Resume-On-Stop mode, and the home menu will appear. <Resume-On-Stop mode> When you press [ B (play)] next time, the playback will start from the point where it has been stopped. Note ⢠Playbac k will also stop and the home menu will appear when you press [( h o m e ) ] . ⢠For BD- Java application, the Resume- On-Stop may not be available. ⢠If you press [OK] instead of [ B (pl ay)] , playback can be star ted from the beginning of the disc even if it was in the Resume -On-Stop mode. ⢠Y ou can also start from the beginning of the disc if you press [ S (previous)] while the resume message is displayed. ⢠The resume message can be r emoved by pressing [BACK U ] . ⢠Resume -On-Stop mode remains in effect even after power is turned off , but will be can celled once the disc is ejected. ⢠If you change âÂÂ3D Outputâ setting to âÂÂ2Dâ while the unit is in the Resume- On-Stop mode of Blu-ray 3D Disc playback, the resume information will be clear ed.
27 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN â¢U s e [ K / L] to move the highlight up an d down in the list. ⢠T o access the files in a group (folder), select the d esired group (folder), then pr ess [OK] . â¢P r e s s [ s] , or select [ ], then press [OK] to go back to the previous hierarch y. â¢P r e s s [ s] to go back to the previous screen. â¢P r e s s [Blue] or [Yellow] to change the page of the list. â¢P r e s s [Red] to go back to the media filter screen. â¢P r e s s [( h o m e ) ] to go back to th e home menu. Recommended specifications: DivXî Official DivXî Certified product MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio JPEG Resolution Folder / File number limitations: BD, DVD and SD card ⢠999 folders (gr oups) and 9,999 files. CD ⢠255 folders (gr oups) and 999 tracks / files. Playing Back an Audio CD or a Disc with Di vXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Files How to Navigate through the Track / File List ⢠Playable codec of A VI files : DivXî 3.x, DivX î 4.x, DivXî 5.x, DivXî 6.x ⢠Maximum size of a video : 1920 x 1080 @60 fps ⢠Sampling frequency of audio : 16 kHz - 48 kHz ⢠Audio type : MPEG1 audio layer 3(MP3), MPEG1 audio lay er 2, Dolby Digital ⢠Sampling frequency : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Constant bit rate : 112 kbps - 320 kbps (MP3), 48 kbps - 192 kbps (Windows Media⢠Audio) ⢠Upper limit : : 2,560 x 1,900 dots (sub sampling is 4:4:4) 5,120 x 3,840 dots (sub sampling is up to 4:2:2) ⢠Low er limit : 32 x 32 dots ⢠Maximum file size of a picture :5 M B Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
28 BASIC PLAYBACK EN 1 Insert a disc (ref er to âÂÂHow to Insert a Discâ on page 25) . ⢠Home menu appears automatically. 2 With âÂÂPlay Discâ selected, press [OK]. ⢠Media filter screen will appear . ⢠F or audio CD, skip to step 4. 3 Select the type of the file you want to play back in the media filter screen. Then press [OK] to display the file list. Blu-ray Disc Pla yer Play Disc SD Card Home Networ k Settings âÂÂVideoâ : If you want to play back video files such as DivXî video, select âÂÂVideoâÂÂ. âÂÂMusicâ : If you want to play back music files such as MP3 or Windows Media⢠Audio, select âÂÂMu sicâÂÂ. âÂÂPicturesâ : If you want to play back the still images such as JPEG pictures, select âÂÂPicturesâÂÂ. BD-Play er Play Disc Video Music Pictures 4 Select a group (folder) or trac k / file you want to play back. Then press [ B (play)] or [OK] to start playback. Refer to âÂÂHow to Naviga te through the Track / File Listâ on page 27. To skip to the next track / file: Press [ T (next)] . To skip to the previous track / file: Press [ S (previous)] . To pause playback: Press [ F (pause)] . To return to the normal playback: Press [ B (pl ay)] . To stop playback: Press [ C (stop)] . Playback will be in Resume-On-Stop mode. <Resume-On-Stop mode for audio CD / DivXî > Playback will start from the point where it is stopped next time you press [ B (play )] . If you press [OK] instead of [ B (play) ] , playback will start from the beginning of the track / file instead of resuming from the stop point. <Resume-On-Stop mode for MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG > Playback will start from the beginning of the current file next time you pres s [ B (play)] or [OK] . To go back to the media filter screen: Press [Red] in Resume-On-Stop mode. Note ⢠Playbac k will also stop and the home menu will appear when you press [( h o m e ) ] . ⢠If a disc contains A VCHD files, the playback of other files on the same disc is not available. All files on an SD Memor y Card are available. ⢠With regar d to the multi-border BD-RE/-R, additionally r ecorded sections cannot be recognized. ⢠With regar d to the multi-border DVD-RW/-R, ad di tio na ll y re co rde d se c ti on s m ay n ot be recognized.
29 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN This unit can play back Blu-ray 3D Disc which contains stereoscopic 3D video. In orde r to view 3D Blu-ray videos, you need to have the following: - 3D capable TV - HDMI 1.4 cable - 3D glasses - Blu-ray 3D Disc or Blu -ray 3D only Disc This unit can also run JPEG files store d on KODAK Picture CD. You can enjoy picture ima ges on the TV set by playing back the KODAK Pi cture CD. This unit conforms t o ver.7.0 of KODAK Picture CD. For details of KOD AK Picture CD, contact a shop that p rovides developing service of Kodak Inc. Playing Back a Blu-ray 3D Disc 1 Connect 3D capable TV with HDMI 1.4 cable. ⢠Refer to âÂÂC onnec tion to the T V â on page 16. 2 Insert a Blu-ray 3D D isc or a Blu-ray 3D only Disc. ⢠Refer to âÂÂHow t o I nsert a Disc â on page 25. 3 Follow step 2 in âÂÂPlaying Back a BD, DVD or a Disc with AVCHD Filesâ on page 26. Caution ⢠W atching 3D videos may cause headache, dizziness or tiredness. T o avoid such consequences, do not wa tch 3D videos for a long period of time . ⢠W atching 3D videos is not recommended f or the following people: - People wh o are susceptible to motion sickness - Children fro m walking age to seven years -P r e g n a n t w o m a n For more information, refer to âÂÂIMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D TELEVISIONSâ on page 71. Note ⢠F or more information, refer t o the 3D T V â s manual. ⢠When âÂÂ3D Outputâ is set to âÂÂA u t o ( X X ) â and your TV is not 3D capable, playback of Blu-ray 3D Discs will revert to 2D depending on the disc. ⢠Y ou can turn of f 3D output mode by setting â 3D Output â to âÂÂ2DâÂÂ. (Ref er to page 4 5.) ⢠For Blu -ray 3D on ly D is cs, p layb ack in 2 D mod e i s not possible. ⢠Y ou can check the current output mode (2D or 3D) by pressing [INFO ] during playback. KODAK Picture CD 1 Insert a KODAK Picture CD. ⢠Home menu appears automatically. 2 With âÂÂPlay Discâ selected, press [OK]. ⢠Media filter screen will appear . 3 Select âÂÂPicturesâ in the media filter screen. Then press [OK] to display the file list. 4 Follow step 4 in âÂÂPlaying Back a n Audio CD or a Di sc with DivX î / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. Tips for JPEG / KODAK Picture CD Playback ⢠Every press on [ANGLE] will turn the image clockwise by 90 degrees when an image is displayed. Note ⢠Some unplayable folders or files may be listed due to the rec ordi ng st atus. ⢠High-resolution JPEG files take longer to be displayed. ⢠Progr essive JPEG files ( JPEG files saved in progressive format) cannot be played back in this unit. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
30 BASIC PLAYBACK EN You can play back the AVCHD / DivXî / MP3 / WMA / JPEG files in an SD Memory Card. With the SD Memory Card, you can also enjoy the follow ing functions. - Special additional contents for BD-ROM Profile 1 ver.1.1. (For more information about the special additional contents, refer to the instruction book that came with the disc.) - BD-Live function (BD-ROM ver. 2 Profile 2.0). (For more information about BD-Li ve, refer to page 36.) Reading the SD Memory Card 1 Insert an SD card and then press [( h o m e ) ] . Home menu appears. 2 With âÂÂSD Cardâ selected, press [OK]. ⢠Media filter screen will appear . 3 Select the type of the file you want to play back in the media filter screen. Then press [OK] to display the file list. For âÂÂVideoâÂÂ: - If the SD Memory Card contains AVCHD and DivXî files, use [ K / L] to select âÂÂAVCHDâ or âÂÂDivXâÂÂ, then press [OK] . - If the SD Memory Card contains AVCHD files and no DivXî fil es , the playback will start right after you select âÂÂVid eoâÂÂ. (The file list is not available fo r AVCHD files.) 4 Follow step 4 in âÂÂPlaying Back a n Audio CD or a Di sc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. To remove the SD Memory Card: In stop mode, gently push in the SD Memory Card, then pull it out slowly. SD Memory Card Note ⢠In the âÂÂSD Cardâ mode, the resume information will be cleared when; - [ C (stop)] is pressed while in the Resume- On-Stop mode. -the SD Memory Card is r emoved. -the unit is turned into the standby mode . ⢠Do not remove the SD Memor y Card or tur n the unit to the standby mode while the contents of the card are in playback. It may result in malfunction or loss of the cardâ s data. ⢠Do not delete the folders or files in the SD Memor y Card with your c omputer . This unit may not read SD Memor y Cards formatted on a comp uter . ⢠If a folder or file name includes one of the f ollowing unrecognizable characters, the folder or file name may not be displayed c orrectly. -Unrecognizable characters : ⢠Playback of DivXî files in an SD Memor y Card is not guaranteed. . , " = [ ] ; / \ : | ÃÂ¥
31 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN On this unit, you can play video, music and pho to files stored on DLNA certified home media servers connected to your home n etwork. I n order to u se this fe ature, you must connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠T o control the playback, use following buttons. Playing Video / Mu sic / Photo Files from DLNA Certified Home Media Servers 1 Connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠Refer to âÂÂC onnec tion to the Network â on page 20. 2 Set up the necessary network connection settings. ⢠Refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 5 7. 3 Start DLNA home media servers in your home networ k. ⢠F or deta ils, refer to the user manual of the DLNA certified device. 4 Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 5 With "Home Ne twork" select ed, press [OK]. ⢠This unit will star t loading the home ser ver list. ⢠T o cancel loading, press [ C (stop)] . ⢠T o reload the home ser ver list, press [Green] . 6 After loading, home server list will appear. Select a home server you want to access, then press [OK]. 7 File list of the selected home server will appear. Select a file you want to play back, then press [ B (play)] or [OK] to start playback. ⢠If you select a folder , select a file in the folder and then press [ B (play )] or [OK] to start playback. 1) Directory 2) Nu mber of contents in the c urrent hierarchy 3) Icon of the current home server 4) Color key (Red / Green / Blue / Yellow button) guide 5) Group (folder) / file list 6) Folder / media icon 7) Root folder (go back to the previous hierarchy) Button Action S (previous) / T (next) Skip to the previous / next file during playback or in pause mode F (pause) Pause the playback B (play) Return to the normal playback C (stop) Stop the playback (For video files, playback will be in Resume-On-Stop mode.) <Resume-On-Stop mode for video files> Playback will start from the point where it is stopped next time you press [ B (play)] . If you press [OK] instead of [ B (play)] , playback will start from the beginning of the file instead of resum ing from the st op point. 10 002 003 004 File 1 ... Music Photo Video audio 1 audio 2 Pic 1 movie Page Down BD-Player Server 1 Home Network || 3 4 2 1 7 5 6 Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
32 BASIC PLAYBACK EN Useful tips for purchased or rented official DivXî Certified Videos ⢠When you purchase or r ent a DivXî file through the official site of DivXî video which is called DivXî V ideo On-Demand ( VOD) ser vices, a registra tion code is required ev er y time you get the new file from the DivXî VOD services. Refer to âÂÂDivXî VODâ in âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGS â on page 50. âÂÂThis re ntal has c views left. Do you want to use one of your c views now?â Some DivXî VOD files are restri cted with limited playable times. You cannot play th em back beyond the limi t. âÂÂThis player is not authorized to play this video.â You cannot play back DivXî VOD files obtained with different registration codes on this unit. âÂÂThis rental is expired.â You cannot play back DivXî VOD files with an expired rental period. âÂÂThis player does not support this video format.â You cannot play back DivXî files whose resolution exc eeds 1920 x 1080. âÂÂThis player does not support this audio format.â For DivXî files with audio format other than MPEG1 audio layer 3 (MP3), MPEG1 audio layer 2 and Dolby Digital, audio will not be output and only the v ideo will be ou tput. Note ⢠F or the home server list, maximum of 10 ser vers can be displayed. ⢠The system can recognize up to 9,999 files (including fol de r s ). ⢠The 10th and deeper hierarchies cannot be displayed. ⢠This unit supports following formats. (F or mats other than listed be low cannot be reco gnized.) - Video : MP EG 1 MPEG 2 PS MPEG 2 TS / TTS -M u s i c : L P C M MP3 WMA - Photo : JPEG ⢠Unplayable files in the home ser ver will not be displayed in the file list. ⢠F or some files, playback is not available even if displayed in the file list. ⢠In order to play back the contents in ho me servers, the player and the servers must be connected to the same a ccess point . ⢠Compatibility and available playback functio n may differ depending on the home server . ⢠If you select a photo file in step 7 on page 31, the selected file will be played back and go to the next file in the current hierar chy in turn every 10 seconds. ⢠F or photo files, every press on [ANGLE] wil l turn the image clockwise by 90 degrees when an image is displayed. ⢠F or a folder contains only photo files, file list or thumbnail list will be displayed, depending on the information from the home ser ver . ⢠Video files with unsupported audio format will be skipped. ⢠The quality of the playback picture or audio differs depending on your network condition. About DivXî and DivXî VOD Possible Errors Note ⢠A file with an extension of â .a viâ and â .DivXâ is called as a DivXî file. All files with the â .a vi â extension are recognized as MPEG4. ⢠F or CD -RW/-R, maximum of 255 group (folder) or 999 files may be recognized . ⢠F or BD -RE/-R and DVD-R W/-R, maximum of 999 group (folder) or 9,999 files may be recogniz ed. ⢠The 10th and deeper hierarchies cannot be displayed. ⢠Unrecognizable characters will be replaced with â î âÂÂ. ⢠When play ing bac k files recorde d in hi gh bit rates, images can be interr upted in some occasions. ⢠Although DivXî logo has been obtained for this unit, it may not be able to play back some data, depending on the characteri stics, bit rates, or audio format settings, et c. ⢠If a large-sized DivXî file is selected, it may take a while to start the playback (over 20 sec onds sometimes). ⢠If DivXî files written on a CD-R W/-R cannot be played back, rewrite them on a BD-RE/-R or DVD-RW/-R, and try playing them back again. ⢠F or more information about DivX î, please visit http://www.divx.com .
33 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN Subtitles created by the user can be displayed during DivXî playback. 1) Follow steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂPlaying Back an Audio CD or a Disc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. 2) Select a file you want to play back, then press [Green]. Subtitle list will appear. ⢠âÂÂDivX Subtitle â appears next to âÂÂGreen â icon only when DivXî subtitle is available for the selected file. â¢I f y o u p r e s s [ B (pl ay)] or [OK] instead of [Green] , playback without subtitle will star t. 3) Select the desired subtitle file, then press [ B (play)] or [OK]. Playback of the DivXî file with DivXî subtitle will start. Some BD-video, DVD-video or AVCHD files may contain a title menu which describes the contents of the disc, or a disc menu which guides you through the available functions in the disc. With such discs, a title menu or a disc menu may appear automatically when you insert the disc. Otherwise, press [TOP ME NU] or [DISC MENU / POP -UP MENU] to call up the menu. Refer to the discâÂÂs manual on how to navigate through the menu. Playing Back DivXî with DivXî External Subtitle Note ⢠T o utilize this function, the following conditions must be met: -Playback file and subtitle file must have the same name. -Playback file and subtitle file must be loc ated in the same folder . -Only subtitle files with the following extensions are suppor ted; .smi (.SMI), .sr t (.SRT ), .sub (.SUB), .ass (.ASS), .ssa (.SSA), .txt (. T X T ). (.sub (.SUB) and .txt (.TXT ) may not be recognized .) -Subtitles that exc eeds the playback time of the DivXî file will not be displayed. ⢠If the DivXî subtitle file contains more than one subtitle language, you can toggle those by pressing [SUBTITLE] repeatedly. 3dolby .avi SRT SUB SMI Subtitle List Off Cancel Using the Title / Disc Menu Note ⢠Menus vary among discs. Refer t o the information accompanying the dis c for details. ⢠[TOP MENU] or [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] may not work with some discs. ⢠Title menu is also available for SD card with A VCHD files. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
EN 34 SPECIAL PLAYBACK 1) During playback, press [ D (forward)] repeatedly for fast forward. During playback , press [ E (reverse)] repeatedly for fast reverse. Every time you press [ D (forward)] or [ E (reverse)] , the playback speed will change. 2) Press [ B ( play)] to return to the normal playback. 1) During playback, press [ F (pause)] . Then press [ D (forward)]. Every time you press [ D (forward)] , the playback speed changes in 3 different levels. 2) Press [ B ( play)] to return to the normal playback. 1) In pause mode, press [ F (pause)] repeatedly. Every time you press [ F (pause)] , playback will advance one step at a time. 2) Press [ B ( play)] to return to the normal playback. During playback, you can zoom up the picture. . 1) During playback, press [ZOOM] repeatedly. Every time you press [ZOOM] , zoom factor will change. e.g.) DVD-video 2) You can move over the zoomed picture using [ K / L / s / B ]. The gray box with an inner blue box displayed at the right bottom corner of the zoo med image is the position guide. The inner blue box indicates the zoomed area. (Not available for the JPEG and photo files on DLNA home server.) 3) Press [ZOOM] repeatedly to return to the normal playback. Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Note ⢠F or BD, DVD and A VCHD, speed changes in 5 different lev els. ⢠F or audio CD, DivXî, MP3, Windo ws Media⢠Audio, and video / audio files on DLNA home server , speed changes in 3 different levels . ⢠F or some video / music files on DLNA home ser ver or DivXî files , fast forward / fast reverse may not functi on. Slow Forward Playback Note ⢠Only slow forward is available. ⢠F or some video files on DLNA home ser ver or DivXî files , slow forwar d may not function. Step by Step Playback Note ⢠Only step by step forward is available. Zoom Note ⢠F or JPEG files, slide show of the zoomed pic ture is not possible. ⢠For some DivXî files , zoom may not be available. ⢠F or DivXî and JPEG files, 4x z oom is not available. ⢠For some DVDs , 4x zoom is not available. ⢠[ZOOM] does not work during the playback of the BD-vide o. ⢠[ZOOM] does not work while DVD menu is displayed. ⢠For JPEG files, when changing the zoom factor or moving the zoom position, the screen ma y become black for a moment. T his is not a malfunction. Zoom Zoom 1.2x 2x
35 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN EN Available repeat function varies depending on the discs. 1) During playback, press [REPEAT] repeatedly to select the desired repeat function. You can play back the specific part (between point A and point B) repeatedly. 1) During playback, press [REPEAT A-B] once at the point where you want to set point A. 2) During playback, press [REPEAT A-B] again at the point where you want to set point B. As soon as you s et point B, the part between po int A and point B will start to play repeatedly. To cancel A-B repeat: Press [REPEAT A-B] repea tedly until âÂÂOffâ appears. 1) Follow steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂPlaying Back an Audio CD or a Disc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. 2) Open the folder which cont ains the desired JPEG files. 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired f ile to be played back, then press [ B (play)] or [OK]. ⢠An image will be played back fr om the selected file and go to the next one in turn every 10 seconds. 4) Press [ C (stop)] to stop playback. To return to the first item: Press [TOP MENU] . To return to the file played last: Press [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] . Repeat Playback REPEAT MODE AVAILABLE MEDIA Chapter Repeat The current chapter will be played back repeatedly. Title Repeat The current title will be played back repeatedly. Track Repeat The current track or file w ill be played back repeatedly. All Repeat All tracks in the media will be played back repeatedly. Group Repeat The current group (folder) will be played back repeatedly. Random Repeat (Audio CD) Repeats the random playback. Random Repeat (DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG) Repeats the random playback in a folder. Note ⢠The repeat setting will be canc elled when you stop playback. ⢠If you press [REPEAT A-B] when the repeat setting for BD , DVD, CD , A VCHD, DivXî file or video file on DLNA home ser ver is set, the repeat setting will be cancelled. ⢠When the repeat setting is set for a MP3 or WMA folder (file), the repeat setting will be cancelled if you select other MP3 or WMA f older (file) to play back. ⢠F or some video / music / photo files on DLNA home server or DivXî files, repeat pla yback may not functi on. A-B Repeat Note ⢠Point B should be set within the same title, track or file as point A. ⢠If you press [REPEAT A-B] when the repeat setting for BD , DVD , CD, A VCHD , DivXî file or video file on DLNA home ser ver is set, the repeat setting will be cance lled. ⢠For some video files on DLNA home server or DivXî files, A-B repeat playback may not function. ⢠T o cancel the A point which was set, press [CLEAR] . Slide Show Note ⢠Large -size JPEG files take a few moments to be displayed. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
36 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN Some BD-videos have the PiP function which enables you to display the secondary video in the primary video. You can call up the secondary video by pressing [BONUSVIEW (PiP)] whenever the scene contains the secondary video. 1) During playback, press [BONUSVIEW (PiP)]. PiP information will appear. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the secondary video you want to show. ⢠The secondary vide o will be displayed with the secondar y audio. â¢U s e [ s / B] to switch between current setting and âÂÂOf f â . 3) Press [BACK U ] to remove the PiP information. ⢠On how to output the secondar y audio , refer to âÂÂSwitching Au dio Soundtrack â on page 38 and âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â on page 47. You can enjoy BD-Live which enables you to use interactive features when th e unit is connected to the Internet. Examples of BD-Live features: ⢠Online access to additional conten t such as movie trailers, subtitles, BD-Jav a app lications, etc. ⢠While dow nloading, special video data may be played back. - Service and functions differ depe nding on the disc. Follow the instructions given by the disc when using the BD-Live function. - You must insert an SD Memory Card when using the BD-Live function. (SD Memory Card of 1GB or more is recommended.) - Do not remove the SD Memory Card when using the BD-Live function. PiP (BONUSVIEW) Setting Primary video Secondary video Enjoying BD-Live Discs with Int ernet Note ⢠Y ou must connect the unit to the Internet and set up necessary settings in order to use BD-Live. ⢠For the network connection, refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. ⢠For the network setup , refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 57. ⢠F or cer tain discs, f or âÂÂBD-Live Settingâ may need to be changed . ⢠Depending on your connection environment, it may take time to connect to the Internet or t he Internet may not be connected. ⢠When BD-Live functions are used and the unit is connected to the Internet, you may be charged f or this communication. ⢠Some discs with BD -Live function require memory when playing back the content. If you cannot play back a disc with BD -Live function, inser t an SD card(1GB or more) which is formatted on this unit. Note for AACS Online ⢠The player or disc IDs may be sent to the content provider when playing back a disc with BD-Live function. ⢠If you save your viewing hist or y on the ser ver by using these IDs, y ou will be introduced t o other similar movies. ⢠Y ou can save game score histories.
37 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN EN 1) During playback, press [ T (next)] to skip the current title or chapter and move to the next. The title or chapter will move forward by one at a time. ⢠If there is no chapter in on e title, the curr ent title may be skip ped. To go back to the beginning of the current title or chapter, press [ S (previous)] . Press [ S (previous)] repeatedly to go to the previous title or chapter. The title or chapter may move backward one at a time. 1) During playback, press [INFO ]. e.g.) DVD 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂTitleâ or âÂÂChapterâÂÂ. 3) Use [the Number buttons] or [ s / B ] to enter the title / chapter number. 4) Press [OK]. Playback will start from t he beginning of the title / chapter. 5) Press [INFO ] to remove the information display. Title Search In stop mode, enter the title number you want to search using [the Number buttons]. Playback of the title will start in a few seconds. Chapter Search During playback of a title, enter the chapter numbe r you want to search using [the Number buttons]. Playback of the chapter will start in a few seconds. 1) During playback, press [ T (next)] to skip the current track or file and move to the next. The track / file will move forward one at a time. To go back to the beginning of the current track / file press [ S (previous)] . Press it repeatedly to go to the previous track / file. The track / file will move backward one at a time. 1) During playback, press [INFO ]. ⢠F or DivXî files and video files o n DLNA ser ver , skip to step 3). e.g.) DVD 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂPlaying TimeâÂÂ. 3) Use [the Number buttons] to enter the time count you want to jump to. e.g.) Entering 1 hour 45 minutes and 15 seconds. Press 4) Press [OK]. Playback will start f rom the desired time count. 5) Press [INFO ] to remove the information display. Title / Chapter Search Using [ S (previous)] / [ T (next)] Using [INFO ] Using [the Number buttons] (Direct Search) Note ⢠As for the BD-video, how it performs will be strongly determined by the disc, and may not perform as described. 001/023 00:01:31 Dolby Digital 001/012 Disc Title Chapter Playing Time Audio Track Search Using [ S (prev ious)] / [ T (next)] Time Search Note ⢠For some video files on DLNA home server or DivXî files, time sear ch may not function. 001/023 00:01:31 Dolby Digital 001/012 Disc Title Chapter Playing Time Audio Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
38 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN Some video materials may have subtitles in one or more languages. For commercially available discs, the supported languages can b e found on the disc case. Follow the steps below to switch the subtitle language during playback. 1) During playback, press [SUBTITLE] repeatedly to display âÂÂPrimaryâÂÂ, âÂÂSecondaryâ or âÂÂSubtitle StyleâÂÂ. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select your desired subtitle or style. â¢U s e [ s / B] to switch between current subtitle setting and âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 3) Press [SUBTITLE] repeatedly to exit. 1) During playback, press [SUBTITLE]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select your desired subtitle. â¢U s e [ s / B] to switch between current subtitle setting and âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 3) Press [SUBTITLE] to exit. When playing back video material recorded with two or more soundtracks (these are often in different audio languages or audio formats), you can switch them during playback. For BD, available audio varies depending on âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setting. Refer to page 47 for more information. 1) During playback, press [AUDIO] repeatedly to display âÂÂPrimaryâ or âÂÂSecondaryâÂÂ. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct your desired audio stream channel. ⢠F or âÂÂSecondary âÂÂ, use [ s / B] to switch between current audio setting and âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 3) Press [AUDIO] repeatedly to exit. 1) During playback, press [AUDIO]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct your desired audio stream channel. 3) Press [AUDIO] to exit. Switching Subtitles âÂÂPrimaryâ : Sets the subtitle for the primary video. âÂÂSecondaryâ : Sets the subtitle for the secondary video. âÂÂSubtitle Styleâ : Sets style of the subtitle. Note ⢠Some discs will only al low you to change the subtitles from the disc menu or pop-up menu. Press [TOP MENU] or [DISC MENU / POP- UP MENU] to display the disc menu or pop-up menu. ⢠If the disc has no subtitle language or subtitle style, âÂÂNot Available â will be di splayed on the T V screen. ⢠During playback of the secondar y video, the primar y subtitle setting is not available except when there is no subtitle for the secondary video. ⢠F or DivXî ex ternal subtitle, âÂÂPlaying Back DivXî with DivXî External Subtitleâ on page 33. 1 Primar y English 1 Subtitle English Switching Audio Soundtrack âÂÂPrima ryâ : Sets the audio for the primary video. âÂÂSecondaryâ : Sets the audio for the secondary video. Note ⢠The secondary aud io will not be output when the secondar y video is not displayed or when âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â is set to âÂÂPrimary Audio Only âÂÂ. (F or some BD , secondar y audio will be output even when secondary video is off.) ⢠The sound mode cannot be changed during playback of discs not reco r ded in multiple audio. ⢠Some discs allow changing the audio language setting on the disc menu. (Operation varies depending on the discs. Refer to the manual accomp anying the disc.) ⢠[AUDIO] may not work on some discs with multiple audio streams or channels (e.g. DVDs that allow changing audio setting on the disc menu). ⢠If the disc has no audio language, âÂÂNot Available â will be displayed on the T V screen. ⢠F or DTS-CD (5.1 music disc), selecting audio streams or channels is not available. ⢠Y ou can check the selected audio stream in the information display . T o call up the information display, press [INFO ] during playback. 2 Primar y English Dolby Digital Multi 2 Audio English Dolby Digital Multi
39 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN EN Some BD-video and DVD-video contain scenes which have been shot simultaneously from various angles. You can change the camera angle when appears on the TV screen. 1) During playback, press [ANGLE]. ⢠The selected a ngle will be displayed on the display bar at the top of the TV screen. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select your desired angle. 3) Press [ANGLE] to exit. With this feature, you can enjoy your TV as a PC monitor wirelessly using your home n etwork. Make s ure you download the Philips Wireless M ediaConnect software and install it on your PC before you perform the steps below. 1) Start your Internet browser on your PC and open the Philips Wireless MediaConnect downloa d page at www.wifimediaconnect.philips.com . On the website, you can check the necessary PC system requirements. 2) Enter the 12 digit code printed on the bottom of your Blu-ray Disc Play er. 3) Click the âÂÂDownload nowâ button to download the free Philips Wireless MediaConnect software. 4) Once downloaded, start the file âÂÂPhilips Wireless MediaConnect_setup.exeâÂÂ. Follow the instructions on the screen to comple te software installation. 1) Launch Philips Wireless MediaConnect on your PC first. 2) Press [ (home)] on the Blu-ray Disc Player remote. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂMediaConnectâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The startup screen for Philips W ireless M ediaConnect will be displayed and the unit searches for an available PC that is running Philips W ireless MediaConnec t soft ware. Once connected, the Philips Wireless MediaConnect software will encode and stream the screen of your PC as a video along with audio. Depending on your computer and network configuration, there will be a delay between your PC screen and the TV but the audio-video will always be in sync. Philips Wireless MediaConnect Help To read the Philips Wireless MediaConnect Help, right click the program icon in the notification t ray of the PC and select Help. Specifics You can project high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD) video, depending on the processing power of your PC. For smooth playback of HD video, please use a hardware accelerated video player on your computer. A hardware accelerated video player uses the graphics adapter of your PC to render HD video rather than the processor. This frees up the pr ocessor for Philips Wireless MediaConnect video encoding. The content protection on most DVD or Blu-ray Disc movi es might restric t watching the movie on TV when the disc is playing on a PC. The TV shows PC media fil es with a small delay. Philips Wirel ess MediaConnect is only available for PC. PC and network requirements Supported OS Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windo ws 7 (PC only) Minimum requirements ⢠Intel Core 2 Duo 1.8GHz ⢠512MB RAM ⢠IEEE 802.11n Recommended requirements ⢠Intel Core 2 Duo 2.1GHz â¢1 G B R A M Switching Camera Angles Note ⢠If â Angle Iconâ setting is set t o âÂÂOff â , will not appear on the T V screen. (Refer to page 50) Philips Wireless MediaConnect Install Philips Wireless MediaConnect Using Philips Wireless MediaConnect 1 / 5 Angle Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
EN 40 NETFLIX OPERATIONS With this unit, you can wa tch movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from Netfli x via the Internet. In order to use this feature, yo u must visit the following website on your PC and become a Netflix member. netflix.com/Philips After creating a Netflix account at netflix.com/Ph ilips , follow the following pr ocedure before activating the connection to Netfl ix. 1) Connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠Refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. 2) Set up the necessary network connection settings. ⢠Refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 5 7. In order to watch movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from Netflix vi a the Internet, you must activa te the connection between this unit and your Netf lix account. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNETFLIXâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Netflix welcome screen will appear . ⢠F or the first time only , âÂÂNetwork Ser vice Disclaimer â screen will appear . After confirming the content, use [ s / B] to select â Agree âÂÂ, then press [OK] . 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂyes - activate instant streaming from NetflixâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Activation screen with the activati on code will appea r . 4) On your PC, visit netflix.com/activate and log into your account. ⢠The entry screen of activation code will appear on your PC screen. 5) Enter the activation code which is displayed on the TV screen. ⢠The instant Queue will appear . The connection to Netflix is successfully made. ⢠T o browse the in stant Queue and watch movies, sk i p to step 3) in â W atching Streaming Movies â on page 40. After you set up the con nection to Netflix , you can browse the instant Queue and watch movies on your TV. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂNETFLIXâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The instant Queue will appear . 3) Use [ s / B ] to select the desired movie or TV episode, then press [ B (play)] to start playback. ⢠After loading, playback of the selected movie or T V episode will star t. ⢠T o stop the playback , press [ C (stop)] . ⢠T o go back to the insta nt Queue, press [Red] . ⢠T o go back to the home men u, press [( h o m e ) ] . Before Activating the Connection to Netflix Activating the Connection to Netflix Note ⢠Netflix is available only in the United States. ⢠Y ou cannot create a Netflix account on this unit. ⢠If newer version of software is required, software upgrade screen may appear after selec ting âÂÂNETFLIXâ in step 2). (F or software upgrade , refe r to âÂÂSoftware Upgrade â on page 62.) ⢠Y ou can deactivate th e connection to N etflix by setting the âÂÂN etflix Deactivateâ to âÂÂY esâÂÂ. (Refer to page 51.) ⢠The screen image of Netflix may change after upgrading the software . ⢠For questions regar ding the Netfli x ser vice, visit netfli x.com/Help . ⢠When you c ontact the Netfli x customer service, you may be asked for the ESN number , which is a serial number to identify this unit by Netfli x . Y ou can check the ESN number on the bottom of the âÂÂNetflix Deactivate â screen. (Refer to page 51. ) Watching Streaming Movies About the Instant Queue ⢠Instant Queue is the list of movies and T V episodes you add on the Netflix website. (netflix.com ) Y ou can manage the movies and T V episodes in your instant Queue from the Netflix website on your PC. ⢠Y ou cannot add movies or T V episodes to your instant Queue on this unit. ⢠Y ou can remove mo vies or T V episodes from the instant Queue on this unit. Note ⢠The picture quality differs depending on the speed of your Internet connection at the time of loading.
41 EN EN CINEMANOW / BLOCKBUSTER OPERATIONS With this unit, you can watch movies and TV episodes stream ed instantly from CinemaNow / Blockbuster via the Internet. In order to use this feature, yo u must visit the fol low ing website and create a CinemaNow / Blockbuster account. - For Cinema Now, visit w ww.cinemanow.com/Logi n - For Blockbus ter, visit www.blockbuster.com/auth /login After creating a CinemaNow / Blockb uster account, fo llow the following procedure before activating the connection to CinemaNow / B lockbuster. 1) Connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠Refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. 2) Set up the necessary network connection settings. ⢠Refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 5 7. In order to watch movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from CinemaNow / Blockbuster via the Internet, you must activate the connectio n between this unit and your CinemaNow / Blockbuster account. 1) On your PC, visit following website and log into your account to get the activation code. ⢠F ollow the instruc tion given by the website. ⢠T ake a note of the ac tivation code which appears on the PC. - For Cinema Now, visit www.cineman ow.com/activate . - For Bloc kbuster, visit www.blockbus ter.com/ activat e/phil ipsbd . 2) On this unit, press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂCinemaNowâ or âÂÂBLOCKBUSTERâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Menu screen of CinemaNow or Blockbuste r will appear . ⢠F or the first time only , âÂÂNetwork Ser vice Disclaimer â screen will appear . After confirming the content, use [ s / B] to select â Agree âÂÂ, then press [OK] . 4) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to sel ect âÂÂSettingsâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂConfigureâ (Blockbuster), then press [OK]. ⢠F or CinemaNo w, select â Activateâ and press [OK] again in the next screen. ⢠Activation code input screen will ap pear . e.g.) CinemaNow 5) Enter the activation co de displayed on your PC using [ s / B ] and [the Number buttons], then select âÂÂActivateâ and press [OK]. ⢠F or CinemaNow, confirmation message will a ppear . Pre ss [OK] to complete th e setting. CinemaNow Blockbuster Before Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Note ⢠The image of menu screen may change without notice after upgrading the soft ware or the information on CinemaNow / Block buster ser ver is changed . ⢠Y ou cannot create CinemaNow / Blockbuster accoun t on this unit. ⢠T o deactivate the connection to CinemaNow or Blockbuster, selec t âÂÂDeactivateâ in âÂÂSettingsâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂC onfigureâ (Blockbuster). ⢠For questions regar ding CinemaNow ser vice, visit www.cinemanow.com/support . ⢠For questions regar ding Block buster ser vice, visit www.blockbuster.com/ help . Guide to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Menu Screen 1) Movies / Browse : To access the movie list 2) TV Shows : To access the TV show list 3) Search All / Search : To access search screen 4) My Videos / My Library : To access the list of rented or purchased movies / TV episodes 5) Wish List / My Favorites : To access your wish lis t / favorite list 6) Settings / Configure : To access setting / configure menu 7) Help : To access the help p age Movies TV Shows Search All M ovie s TV Show s Search Al l Movies TV Shows Search All My Videos Wish List Settings POWERED BY 12 3 45 6 Help Conï¬Âgure My Favorites My Library Browse Search POWERED BY 1 3 4 5 6 7 Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
42 CINEMANOW / BLOCKBUSTER OPERATIONS EN After you set up the connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster, y ou can rent or purchase movies / TV episodes and watch directly on your TV. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂCinemaNowâ or âÂÂBLOCKBUSTERâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select âÂÂMoviesâÂÂ, âÂÂBrowseâ or âÂÂTV ShowsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠List of movies / T V episodes will appear . 4) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select the desired title, then press [OK]. ⢠Title details scr een of the selec ted title will appear . 5) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂRentâ or âÂÂBuyâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Checkout screen will appear . 6) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂSubmit OrderâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 7) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂWatch NowâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠If you want to continue br owsing, select âÂÂContinue Browsing â and press [OK] to go back to âÂÂMovies â or âÂÂBrowse âÂÂ. From the search screen, you can search for movies / TV episodes by entering search words. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂRenting or Purchasing Movies / TV episodesâ on page 42. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSearch Allâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂFindâ (Blockbuster), then press [OK]. ⢠Keypad screen will appear . 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select characters, then press [OK]. ⢠When you enter a letter , titles that star t with the letter will be displayed on the right side of the screen. 4) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired title from the search result on the righ t side of the screen, then press [OK]. ⢠Title details scr een of the selec ted title will appear . 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂRenting or Pu rchasing Movies / TV episodesâ on page 42. 2) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select âÂÂMy Videosâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂMy Libraryâ (Blockbuster), then press [OK]. ⢠List of rented or purchased movies / TV episodes will appear . 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired ti tle, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂWatch from Startâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂPlay Nowâ (Blockbuster), the n press [OK]. ⢠If you want to r esume playback, select "Resume Play" and press [OK] . ⢠T o stop the playback , press [ C (stop)] . ⢠T o pause the playback , press [ F (pause)] . ⢠T o go back to the home men u, press [( h o m e ) ] . Renting or Purchasing Movies / TV episodes Note ⢠If you selec t â Add to Wish List â (CinemaNow) or â Add to My F avoritesâ (Blockbuster) in title details screen, the title will be added to your â Wish List â or âÂÂMy Fa v o r i t e s â . ⢠F or CinemaNow, if you want to redeem a gift code, select âÂÂRede em Gift Code â in the checkout sc reen, then press [OK] and enter the gift code. ⢠In most cases, rented mo vies or T V episodes are available for 24 hours from the playback starting time. Searching Movies / TV episodes Watching Rented or Purchase d Movies / TV episodes Note ⢠Depending on your network environment and speed, t he playback may be paused or stopped. T o improve pla yback condition, use high speed broadband Internet connection (For details , contact your Internet ser vice provider.)
43 EN EN VUDU OPERATIONS With this unit, you can enj oy VUDU HD on-demand movies / TV episodes an d Internet applications. In order to use this feature, you mus t connect this unit to the Int ernet. (Broadband Internet conne ction of 8 Mbps or faster is recommended.) - For network connecti on, refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. - For network setup, refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 57. For complete instructions on using VUDU service, please visit www.vudu.com/docs to view an updated in-depth online manual. After you set up the net work connection, you must set up a VUDU account and activate this unit before watc hing VUDU movies. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂvuduâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠VUDU App Home scr een will appear . ⢠F or the first time only , âÂÂNetwork Ser vice Disclaimer â screen will appear . After confirming the content, use [ s / B] to select â Agree âÂÂ, then press [OK] . 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select âÂÂVUDU moviesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠VUDU welcome screen will appear . 4) Select âÂÂSIGN Up NowâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 5) Enter the e-mail address you would l ike associat ed with your VUDU account. A f ter yo u enter your e -mail address correctly, select âÂÂDoneâ and press [ OK]. ⢠Activation e -ma il will be sent to the e -mail add ress. ( Y ou must have access to the e-mail address to activate VUDU.) 6) Follow directions in the activation e-mail to complete your account activation. App Home screen is the entry point to VUDU applications including VUDU movies. When you select âÂÂVUDU moviesâ in App Home screen, VUDU movies home screen will appear. Activating VUDU Note ⢠Y ou can deac tivate the conne ction to VUDU by setting â Vudu Deactivate â to â Y esâÂÂ. (Refer to pa ge 51.) ⢠For question s regardi ng VUDU ser vice, pleas e cont act VUDU Cus tomer Care at 1-888-554-V UDU (8838) or visit www.vudu.com/support . Guide to VUDU Menu Screen App Home Screen 1) Viewing mode : List of different viewing modes for App Home applications 2) Promotional graphics : Placeho lder where promotional graphics are displayed 3) Application list : Grid of applications in the selected viewing mode VUDU Movies Home Screen 1) Most Watched : To access the list of popular movies / TV episodes on VUDU 2) New on Vudu : To access the list of newly available movies / TV episodes 3) Explore Catalog : To access the list of options to search movies / TV episodes 4) My Vudu : To access the list of rented or purchased contents Note ⢠Y ou can go bac k to VUDU movies home screen by pressing [Blue] while you are using VUDU movies features. Most Popular 1 2 3 My Fav orites Most Popular Newest Browse by Genre 12 3 4 Most W atched New on V udu Explore Catalog My Vu d u Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
44 VUDU OPERATIONS EN After activating this unit, you are ready to purchase or rent movies / TV episodes and wa tch directly on your TV. 1) Select a desired movie or TV episode by navigating VUDU movies menus. Press [OK] to display the âÂÂMOVIE DETAILSâ screen. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂRent / OwnâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select a desired quali ty option, then press [OK]. ⢠Select the quality option that best suits your network environment. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂRent for $*.**â or âÂÂBuy for $*.**âÂÂ, then press [OK] to confirm your rental or purchase. 5) Select âÂÂWatch Nowâ to start playing the movie / TV episode. ⢠If you want to return to the âÂÂMOVIE DE T AILSâÂÂ, selec t âÂÂW at ch La te râÂÂ. 1) In VUDU movies home screen, select âÂÂMy Vuduâ and press [OK]. 2) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂMy RentalsâÂÂ, âÂÂMy Moviesâ or âÂÂMy TV ShowsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select a desired movie / TV episode, then press [OK]. 4) Select âÂÂWatchâ or âÂÂWatch ***â to start watching the movie / TV episode. ⢠During playback , use following buttons to control the playback. In addition to VUDU movies, you can use various kinds of Internet applications. 1) In App Home screen, use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired application and press [OK]. 2) Follow the instructions on screen of the selected application. Renting or Purchasing VUDU Movies Video Resolution Minimum Bit Rate SD 480p 1 Mbps HD 720p 2.25 Mbps HDX 1080p 4.5 Mbps Note ⢠A vailable quality op tions differ de pending on th e content. Watching Rented or Purchased VUDU movies Button Action [ F (pause)] Pause the playback. [ C (stop)] Stop the playback. [ E (reverse)] / [ D (forward)] Fast reverse or forward the playback. [ B (play )] Resume the playback. [Yellow] Display the info banner which shows the playback information. [( h o m e ) ] Go back to the home menu. Note ⢠Availa ble buttons and actions ma y subject to change without notice . Using Internet Applications Note ⢠Availa ble applications may change without no tice.
45 EN EN LIST OF SETTINGS In the settings menu, you can cu stomize the various kinds of settings as you prefer. Refer to the following instruc tion to navigate throug h the settings menus. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to move the highlight up and down in the list. ⢠Options of the highlighted item will be displa yed in the list on the right whenever available. 5) To make a selection or to access options of an item, sele ct the desired item, then press [OK]. ⢠T o go back to the previous screen, press [BACK U ] . 6) Press [ (home)] to exit. Refer to the following ta ble for the types of settings y ou can customize. The item highlighted in gray is the default setting. Category Menus / Opti ons Description 3D Outpu t This feature is available only when the display device is connected by an HDMI cable. Auto (XX) Sets the 3D output mode for playback of Blu-ray 3D Discs. âÂÂAuto (XX)âÂÂ: Playback picture will be output in 3D or 2D mode, depending on a disc or the connected TV. (Inside the parenthesis next to âÂÂAutoâ will be the current output mode.) âÂÂ3DâÂÂ: Outputs the picture in 3D mode. âÂÂ2DâÂÂ: Outputs the picture in 2D mode. 3D 2D Language Audio Default Sets the audio languag e for BD-video, DVD-video or AVCHD playback. ⢠If y ou select âÂÂDefaultâÂÂ, the discâ s original language will be in effect. Ceà ¡tina Dansk Deutsch English Español Français Italiano Magyar Nederlands Norsk Polski Português àÃÂÃÂÃÂúøù suomi Svenska Türkçe Subtitle Off Sets the subtitle language for BD- video, DVD-video or AVCHD playback. Ceà ¡tina Dansk Deutsch English Español Français Italiano Magyar Nederlands Norsk Polski Português àÃÂÃÂÃÂúøù suomi Svenska Türkçe Disc Menu Ceà ¡tina Dansk Deutsch Norsk Polski Português àÃÂÃÂÃÂúøù suomi Svenska Türkçe Sets the language for disc menu. English Español Français Italiano Magyar Nederlands Player Menu Auto (XXXX) Sets th e language for player menu (OSD menu) âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Activates the Get & Set Menu Language function. Refer to page 62. ⢠â Autoâ is available only when âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CEC)â is set to âÂÂOnâÂÂ. ⢠Inside the par enthesis next to â Auto â will be the current selected language . English Español Français Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
46 LIST OF SETTINGS EN Category Menus / Opti ons Description Video Output TV Shape ⢠Ref er to page 52 for more information. 4:3 Normal 4:3 Crop 16:9 Widescre en Sets the aspect ratio of the playback image to fit your TV. 16:9 Squeeze HDMI Video HDMI 1080p/24 ⢠This feature is avai labl e only when the display device is connec ted by an HDMI cable. ⢠Ref er to page 52 for more information. Auto âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Outputs the pictu re in 1080p/24 (1080 progressive with 24 frames per second) when it meets all the conditions listed below: ⢠Th e video resolution and the fram e rate of the material is 10 80p/24 . ⢠âÂÂHDMI V ideo Resolutionâ setting is set to âÂÂ1080pâÂÂ. ⢠Th e display device suppor ts the 1080p/24 output. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: ⢠O u t p u t s t h e p i c t u r e i n 1 0 8 0 p / 6 0 . (60 frames per second, progressive) Off HDMI Vide o Resolution ⢠This feature is avai labl e only when the display device is connec ted by an HDMI cable. ⢠Ref er to page 52 for more information. Auto Sets the resolution of th e video signal being output fr om the HDMI OUT jack. ⢠Th e selected resolution must also be suppor ted by your T V monitor. 480p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI Deep Color ⢠This feature is avai labl e only when the display device is connec ted by an HDMI cable, and when i t sup por t s Dee p Col or fea tu re. Auto Reduces the posterization effect of the playback picture. âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Reduces the posterization effect by automatically outputting up to 3 6 bit color whenever the unit recognizes the connected display device supports Deep Color feature. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: Outputs the standard 24 bit color. Off Component Output 480i Sets resolution for component output picture. ⢠Th e selected resolution must also be suppor ted by your T V monitor. ⢠Ref er also to your TV â s manual. ⢠If you hav e selected the reso lution not s upp or ted by your T V by mi stake and the pic ture gets dist urbed, press and hold [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its default. ⢠W hen HDMI cable is connected, only âÂÂ480iâ and the resolutio n selected in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolution â will be avail ab le. 480p 720p 1080i With regard to DVD-video with copy protection, the resolution will be set to 480p regardless of the setting here. If 480p output is not available, 480i will be output.
47 LIST OF SETTINGS EN EN Category Menus / Opti ons Description Video Output De-interlacing Mode Auto âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Automatically det ects film or video content, and appropriately converts it. âÂÂVideoâÂÂ: Select this option when the picture is distorted when using âÂÂAutoâÂÂ. Video Black L evel On Adjusts brightness to compensate for ambient room light. Off HD Noise Reduction On Reduces no ise of the playback picture. âÂÂOnâÂÂ: Activates Noise Reduction. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: Deactivates No ise Reducti on. Off Audio Night Mode Auto Compresses range between soft and loud sounds. âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Night Mode will be activated automatically when Dolby TrueHD audio is played back. âÂÂOnâÂÂ: Activates the Night Mode. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: Deactivates the Night Mode. On Off Down Sampling On Sets the sampling rate for outpu tting PCM audio from the digital output (coaxial). âÂÂOnâÂÂ: Over 96 kHz PCM audio wil l be down sampled at 48 kHz. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: For BD or DVD recorded in LPCM wi th ou t c o pyr i gh t p ro t ec ti on , 2-channel audio signals up to 96 kHz are output as LPCM signal s. Off Virtual Surround On Select âÂÂO nâ to enjoy stereophonic virtual space through your existing 2 channel stereo system during playback of B D-video or DVD-vide o. Off Blu-ray Disc A udio Mix Audio Output âÂÂMix Audio Outpu tâÂÂ: The audio for the secondary video and the interactive application will be output together with the audio for the primary video. âÂÂPrimary Au dio OnlyâÂÂ: Only audio for the primary video will be output. When playing back a BD-video which only contains primary audio, the audio output will be the same case as âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ even if the âÂÂBlu- ray Disc Audioâ is set to âÂÂMix Audi o OutputâÂÂ. Primary Audio Only Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
48 LIST OF SETTINGS EN Category Menus/Options Description Audio HDMI Audio â¢T h i s f e a t u r e i s availa ble on ly wh en the display device is connected by an HDMI cable . ⢠Ref er to page 53 for more information. HDMI Normal Sets the audio format for sound output from the HDMI OUT jack. PCM Off Digital Out ⢠When HD MI cable is connected, make sure âÂÂHDMI Audio â setting is set to âÂÂOff â to chang e the âÂÂDigital Outâ setting. ⢠Ref er to page 55 for more information. Bitstream Sets the audio format for the sound output from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack. PCM Ratings Lock ⢠Ref er to page 56 for more information. Rating Level All Sets the rating level for the disc playback. 8 [Adult] to 1 [Kid Safe] New PIN Sets the new password for the âÂÂRatings Lockâ setting.
49 LIST OF SETTINGS EN EN Category Menus / Options Description Network Connection ⢠Refer to pages 57-61 for mor e information. Connection Test Perform a network connection test. After you change IP address or DNS setting, always perform this test. Network Selection Wired Connection Standard If you sel ect âÂÂStanda rdâ , connection test will automatically sta rt. Manual IP Address Setting Auto(DHCP) Set the IP address. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default setting. Manual IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Setting Auto(DHCP) Set the DNS setting. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default setting. Manual Primary DNS Second ary DNS Proxy Setting Do Not Use Set the proxy server. In most case s, you can connect to the Internet without using proxy server. Use Proxy Address Proxy Port Connection Speed Auto Set the connection speed. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default setti ng. 10BASE Half 10BASE Full 100BASE Half 100BASE Full BD-Live Setting Allow You can restrict Inte rnet access when BD-Liv e functions are used . Limited Allow Prohibit Network Status You can check the current status of the network setting. Wireless Connection Wireless Router Find wireless network WEP/WPA Authenti- cation Set up the connection to the wireless router and enter the WEP/WPA key required for wireless network connecti on. Manually enter your SSID Wireless Router Status You can check the cur rent status of the wireless router setting. Advanced Settings Standard If you select âÂÂStanda rdâ , connection test will automatically start. Manual IP Address Setting Set the IP address. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any chan ges to the default setting. DNS Setting Set the DNS set ting. In most cases, you can conne ct to th e Intern et with out making an y changes to the de fault setting . Proxy Setting Set the proxy server. In most case s, you can connect to the Internet without using proxy server. BD-Live Setting You can restrict Internet access when BD-Liv e functions are used . Network Status You can chec k the current status of the network setting. Disable Yes Deactivates the network connection. No Disclaimer Displays the network service disclaimer. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
50 LIST OF SETTINGS EN Category Menus / Options Descrip tion Others Angle Icon On âÂÂOnâÂÂ: The angle icon automatically appears on the TV screen when playing back conte nt with various camera angles available. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: The angle icon does not automatically appear on the TV screen when playing back content with various camera angles available. Off Front Panel Brightness Bright Dim Sets the brightness of the front panel display. When âÂÂAutoâ is selected, the front panel display automatically goes dim during playback. Auto Screen Saver On Sets whether to activate the screen saver after 5 minutes of no action on the unit. Off Slide Show Transition Cut In/Out Sets the visual effect for the slide show transition mode. âÂÂCut In/OutâÂÂ: The pictu res will cu t in and out sharply as playback progre sses. âÂÂFade In/OutâÂÂ: The pictures will fade in and out as playback progresses . Fade In/Out DivXî VOD Registration Co de Your re gistration code is : cccccccccc To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod This menu item provides you with the DivXî VOD registration code. The DivXî registration code is re quired when downloading DivXî VOD files from the Internet. To learn more about DivXî VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod. Deactivation Code Your de activat ion code is : cccccccc To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod This menu item provides you with the DivXî VOD deactivatio n code. The DivXî deactivation code is required when re-downloading DivXî VOD files from the Internet after deactivating. To learn more about DivXî VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod. Deactivation Y es This menu deactivates this unit and provides you with new registration code and deactivati on code in order to download DivXî VOD files fro m the Internet. No EasyLink (HDMI CEC) â¢T h i s f e a t u r e i s availa ble on ly wh en the display device is connected with an HDMI cable, and when it supports EasyLink (HDMI CEC) feat ure. ⢠Ref er to page 62 for more information. On Sets whether to utilize the EasyLink (HDMI CEC) function. EasyLink (HDMI CEC) function allows your PHILIPS brand EasyLink TV to act in conjunction with this unit or vice versa. Off
51 LIST OF SETTINGS EN EN Category Menus / Options Description Others Software Upgrade ⢠Ref er to page 62 for m ore information. Disc Upgrade Yes Set the disc upgrade. You can upgrade the software version by using a disc. To download the latest software version, please visit www.philips.com/support. No Network Upgrade Yes Set the network upgrade. You can upgrade the software version by connecting this unit to the Internet. No Product Info Displays the product info screen. Factory Default Settings Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Resets all the settings, except for âÂÂRating s Lockâ and âÂÂNet work ConnectionâÂÂ, in âÂÂSettingsâ to the factory default. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the initialization. No Format S D Card Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Re-format SD card. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not format the SD card. No Local Stor age Player Y es âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Re-format local sto rage (Player) used for BD-Java. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the initialization. No SD Card Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Re-format local storage (SD card) used for BD-Java. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not format the SD card. No Network Settings Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Initializes manually entered or automatic (default) network settings. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the initialization. No Netflix Deactivate Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Deactivates the connection to Netflix. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the deactivation. No Vudu Deactivate Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Deactivates the connection to VUDU. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the deactivation. No Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
EN 52 SETUPS Use this feature to adjust the aspect ratio of the video source which is different from yo ur TVâÂÂs ratio to fit your TV monitor without distorting the picture. D escriptions of each setting are as follows: Set the resolution of the video signal being output from the HDMI OUT jack. You can select the desi red âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ among the settings listed below: âÂÂAutoâÂÂ,âÂÂ480pâÂÂ,âÂÂ720pâÂÂ,âÂÂ1080iâÂÂ,âÂÂ1080pâ â¢ When you make a selection, the T V monitor temporarily goes blank and then comes back again. I f it does not, press [HDMI] to change the resolution or press and hold [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its de fault. Actual Output Resolution by Media: (*1) To output the video i n 24 Hz, the connected d isplay device must support 24 Hz output, and âÂÂHDMI 1080p/24â should be set to âÂÂAutoâÂÂ. Otherwise, the ima ge will be output in 60 Hz. ⢠When HDMI cable is connected, only âÂÂ480iâ and the resolution selected in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ will be available for the âÂÂC omponent Output âÂÂ. ⢠Composit e video out (VIDEO OUT ) can only o utput 480i/60. ⢠F or A VCHD and DivXî, outputting the video in 24 Hz (1080p/24) is not a vailable. TV Shape home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂVideo Outputâ A âÂÂTV Shape â Video source Your TV Option Description 16:9 4:3 4:3 Normal To enjoy 16:9 picture on 4:3 monitor: 16:9 picture is scaled down until both sides of the picture fits the 4:3 TV. 4:3 Crop To enjoy 16:9 picture on 4:3 monitor: Both sides of the picture are trimmed to fit the 4:3 TV without distorting the aspect r atio of the picture. 16:9 16:9 Widescreen To enjoy 16:9 picture on 16:9 monitor: Select this setting when you want to enjoy 16:9 picture on the 16:9 TV. 4:3 16:9 Squeeze To enjoy 4:3 picture on 16:9 monitor: Use this setting to display 4:3 picture on the 16:9 TV without distorting the aspect ratio of the picture. HDMI Video Resolution home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂVideo Output â A âÂÂHDMI Videoâ A âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ Media BD Setting in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ Source 480i/60 720p/60 1080i/60 720p/24 1080p/24 480p 480p/60 480p/60 480p/60 480p/60 480p/60 720p 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 1080i 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080p 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/24 or 60 (*1) Auto The highest re solution support ed by your display device will be in effect automatical ly. Media DVD AVCHD DivXî Photo viewing OSD-only viewing Setting in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ Source 480i/60 1080p/24 60, 30, other 480p 480p/60 480p/60 48 0p/60 4 80p/60 480p/6 0 720p 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 1080i 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080p 1080p /60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 Auto The highest resolution su pported by your display device will be in eff ect automatically. Note ⢠The selected resolution must also be s uppor ted by your display device. ⢠If your T V and the unit is connected by a DVI cable and if you select â Auto âÂÂ, âÂÂ480pâ will be in effe c t automatically. â¢P r e s s i n g [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds changes the setting back to its default. (âÂÂCo mponent Output â setting will also be reset to default (480i) .) ⢠Refer also to your TV â s manual. ⢠When the HDMI OUT jack is outputting the video in 1080p/24, picture will not be output from the VIDEO OUT jack and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. ⢠When playing back a F rame Sequential 3D Disc, video resolution of output picture will depend on contents on the disc. (âÂÂHDMI V ideo Resolution â setting is not effective for F rame Sequential 3D Discs.)
53 SETUPS EN EN Refer to the table below to see which setting you should choose. HDMI Audio home A âÂÂSetti ngsâ A âÂÂAudioâ A âÂÂHDMI Audioâ âÂÂHDMI Audioâ setting A âÂÂHDMI Normalâ âÂÂPCMâ âÂÂOffâ âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setti ng A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ âÂÂPrimary Au dio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Regardle ss Media ê Audio Source ê Which audio format can be output depends on the compat ibility of the connected device. BD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *1 or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *2 or Mute Multi PCM *1 or Mute Multi PCM *2 or Mute Mute Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *3 or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *4 or Mute Multi PCM *3 or Mute Multi PCM *4 or Mute Mute DTSî DTSî or Multi PCM or Mute DTSî or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DTS-HDî DTS-HDî or DTSî or Multi PCM *1 or Mute DTSî or Multi PCM *5 or Mute Multi PCM *1 or Mute Multi PCM *5 or Mute Mute LPCM Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DVD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital, Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DTSî DTSî, Multi PCM or Mu te Multi PCM or Mute Mute LPCM 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute DTS-CD DTSî DTSî, Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute AVCHD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute LPCM Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
54 SETUPS EN *1 ) Full decoded. *2 ) Only the independent su bstream is decoded. *3 ) Dolby TrueHD stream is decoded. *4 ) Only the Dolby Digital substream is decod ed. *5 ) Only the core substream is dec oded. ⢠When playing back a BD-video which only contains the primar y audio, the audio output will be the same case as the âÂÂPrimary Audio Only â even if th e âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â is set to âÂÂM ix Audio Output âÂÂ. âÂÂHDMI Audioâ setting A âÂÂHDMI Normalâ âÂÂPCMâ âÂÂOffâ âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setti ng A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ âÂÂPrimary Au dio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Regardle ss Media ê Audio Source ê Which audio format can be output depends on the compat ibility of the connected device. DivXî Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute MP3 / MP2 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute Audio CD PCM 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute MP3 MP3 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute Windows Media⢠Audio WMA 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute DLNA Video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute MP2 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute LPCM Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DLNA Music MP3 / WMA / LPCM 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute Netflix WMA 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute CinemaNow AAC 2ch AAC or PCM or Mute PCM or Mute Mute Blockbuster AAC 2ch AAC or PCM or Mute PCM or Mute Mute VUDU Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *1 or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *2 or Mute Multi PCM *1 or Mute Multi PCM *2 or Mute Mute MP3 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute
55 SETUPS EN EN Refer to the table below to see which setting you should choose. *1 ) Full decoded. *2 ) Only the independent su bstream is decoded. *3 ) Dolby TrueHD stream is decoded. *4 ) Only the Dolby Digital substream is decod ed. *5 ) Only the core substream is dec oded. ⢠When playing back a BD-video which only contains the primar y audio, the audio output will be the same case as the âÂÂPrimary Audio Only â even if th e âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â is set to âÂÂM ix Audio Output âÂÂ. Digital Out home A âÂÂSetti ngsâ A âÂÂAudioâ A âÂÂDigital Outâ âÂÂDigital Outâ setting A âÂÂBitstreamâ âÂÂPCMâ âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setting A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ âÂÂPrimary Aud io Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Media ê Audio Source ê BD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch PC M *2 Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM *3 DownMix 2ch PC M *4 DTSî DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DTS-HDî DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch PC M *5 LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DVD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM DTS-CD DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM AVCHD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DivXî Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP3 / MP2 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Audio CD PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM MP3 MP3 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Windows Media⢠Audio WMA 2ch PCM 2ch PCM DLNA Video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP2 2ch PCM 2ch PCM LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DLNA Music MP3 / WMA / LPCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Netflix WMA 2ch PCM 2ch PCM CinemaNow AAC 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Blockbuster AAC 2ch PCM 2ch PCM VUDU Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch PC M *2 MP3 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
56 SETUPS EN Some BD-video or DVD-video feature a ratings lock level. Playback will stop if the rating s exceed th e levels you set, it will require you to enter a password before the disc will play back. This feature prevents your children from viewing inappropriate material. 1) With âÂÂRatings Lockâ selected in the âÂÂSettingsâ menu, press [OK]. 2) If a PIN code has not been set, proceed to step 2-a). If a PIN code has already been set, proceed to step 2-b). If you want to change the PIN code , proceed to step 2-c). If you forget the PIN code, proceed to step 2-d). 2-a) Enter 4 digit PIN code using [the Number buttons] . ⢠âÂÂ4737â cannot be used. ⢠Press [Red] to return to the previous screen. 2-b) Enter 4 digit PIN code using [the Number buttons] . 2-c) Follow step 2-b). Select âÂÂNew PINâÂÂ, then press [OK] . Enter the new PIN code. 2-d) Enter âÂÂ4737âÂÂ. Current PIN code and the âÂÂRatings Lockâ settings are now cleared. Follow step 1) and step 2-a) to create a new PIN code. 3) After entering the PIN code, âÂÂRating Levelâ appears. (If not, use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂRating LevelâÂÂ.) Select desired rating level then press [OK]. To cancel ratings lock temporarily Some discs allow you to cancel the ratings lock temporarily. With those discs, the message below will appear when you try to play them back. âÂÂPlease enter your PIN to unblock content. â Follow the instruction which appears on the TV screen to cancel the ratings lock. After entering the PIN code, âÂÂRating Levelâ appears. Select desired rating level, then press [OK]. Ratings Lock home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂRati ngs Lockâ Language 3D Output Video Output Audio Ratings Loc k Rating Lev el New PIN Others F actor y Default Network Connection Enter new PIN. Enter your PIN. RATING EXPLANATIONS All ⢠Ratings Lock Con trol is inactive; all discs can play back. 8 [Adult] ⢠DVD sof tware of any grades (adult / general / children) can be played back. 7 [NC-17] ⢠No one under 17 admitted. 6 [R] ⢠Restricted; under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian. 5 [PGR] ⢠P arental Guidance Recommended. 4 [PG-13] ⢠Unsuitable for children under 13. 3 [PG] ⢠P arental Guidance suggested. 2 [G] ⢠General Audience . 1 [Kid Safe] ⢠Suitable for children. Rating Lev el All 8 [Adult] 7 [NC-17] 6 [R] 5 [PGR] 4 [PG-13] 3 [PG] 2 [G] New PIN
57 SETUPS EN EN Set up network connection setti ngs in order to use BD-Live, DLNA home med ia server, Netflix / CinemaNow / Bl ockbuster / VUDU or n etwork upgrade functio n. After you enable a network connection or change the network settings, always perform the connection test to check if the connection is correctly made. 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSettingsâ in the home menu, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNetwork ConnectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂConnection TestâÂÂ, then press [OK]. Connection test will start automatically and the test result will appear right after the connection test finishes. ⢠â T esting... â : The test is in progr ess. ⢠âÂÂP assâ : Co nnection test is succ essfully complet ed. ⢠âÂÂF ailâ : Connection test failed. Check the connection settings. If the connection test passes, press [OK] . ⢠Confirmation screen of the network selection will ap pear . e.g.) Wired connection Press [OK] again to display the confirmation screen of network settings. 4) Press [OK] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Select âÂÂWired Connectionâ if you made a wired connection and set the setting to â StandardâÂÂ(wired ) or âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired), in accordance with your network environment. Standard (Wired) Network settings are set to th e follo wing sett ings initially. (In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default settings.) If you want to set t he network settings back to the defaul t settings as above (except âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ), follow the procedure below. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂCo nnectio n Testâ on p age 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNetwork SelectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use[ K / L ] to select âÂÂWired ConnectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂStandardâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The unit will start the connection test automatically . ⢠If the connec tion test passes, press [OK] to go back to the home menu. ⢠If the connec tion test fails, press [OK] to go back t o the previous screen. Please verify your settings and try again. Network Connection home A âÂÂSettings â A âÂÂNetwork Connecti onâ Connection Test Network Selection Wired then press 'OK'. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gate way Primar y DNS Secondary DNS then press 'OK'. Note ⢠If the conn ection test pas ses, you are ready to use BD-Live, DLNA home media ser ver , Netfli x / CinemaNow / Blockbuster / VUDU or network upgrade function, using the Internet without making any a dditional setti ngs. ⢠If the conn ection test fa ils, you may need to change the MA C address settings on your rout er . Y ou can check the MAC addr ess of this unit on âÂÂNetwork Statusâ screen (ref er to page 60). ⢠When connecting this unit directly to a modem for the first time or connecting it to a modem which was previously connected to any other network device(e.g . a router , PC, etc.), you ma y have to power cycle the modem to reset the settings on the modem. Wired Connection - IP Address Setting Auto(DH CP) - DNS Setti ng Auto(DHCP) - Proxy Setting Do Not Use - Connection Sp eed Auto - BD-Live Settin g Allow Note ⢠The setting of âÂÂBD-Live Setting â will not be set back to the default, even if you f ollow the procedure. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
58 SETUPS EN Manual (Wired) In following cases, select âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired ) to set each setting as necessary. - When connec tion test failed with the setting of âÂÂStandardâÂÂ(wired). - When instructed by your Inte rnet service provider to make specific settings in accordance with your network environment. To set the network set ting to âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired), foll ow the following procedure. 1) Follow steps 1) to 3) in âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂManualâÂÂ, then press [OK]. - Setting menu of âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired) will be displayed. Set each setting as necessary. IP Address Setting / DNS Setting 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂIP Address SettingâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. If you select âÂÂManualâÂÂ, follow the following instruction to set the IP address and DNS. 2-a) IP address set ting screen will appear. Enter I P address, subnet mask and default gateway with cursor button s and number buttons. ⢠Enter the IP address number af ter checking the specifications of your router . ⢠If the IP address is unknown, check the IP address of other devices . (e.g. PC connected via LAN cable) and assign a d ifferent number from those of other devices. After you enter all correctly, press [OK] to go to the DNS setting screen. 2-b) DNS setting screen will appear. Enter primary DNS and secondary DNS with cursor buttons and number buttons. ⢠Enter the DNS addresses pro vided by your Internet provider . ⢠If the DNS address is unknown, check the DNS address of other devices (e .g. PC connected via LAN cable) and assign the same DNS address. 2-c) After you enter all correctly, press [OK] . ⢠Confirmation message will appear . Selec t âÂÂY esâ to complete the settings. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. âÂÂAuto(DHCP)â : If your router has DHCP server function, select âÂÂAuto(DHCP)âÂÂ. âÂÂManualâ : If your router does not have DHCP server function, select âÂÂManualâÂÂ. IP Address Setting IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gate way Clear OK Note ⢠The range of input numbers is between 0 and 255. ⢠If you enter a number larger than 255, the number will automatically be 255. ⢠The manually entered addresses will be saved even if you change the setting to â Auto(DHCP)â . ⢠When you enter a wrong number , press [Red ] to cancel. (the number will be back to âÂÂ0âÂÂ.) ⢠If you want to ent er 1 or 2 digit number in one cell, press [ B] to move on to t he next cell. ⢠If the entered IP add ress or the default gateway or primary DNS address is same as the default setting, IP address setting will be set to â Auto(DHCP)âÂÂ. ( The manually entered number will be saved). ⢠When IP address setting is s et to âÂÂManual âÂÂ, the setting of DNS setting will automatically be âÂÂManualâ and when IP address setting is set to â Auto(DHCP)âÂÂ, you can set either â Auto(DHCP)â or âÂÂManual â for DNS setting. DNS Setting Primar y DNS Secondary DNS Clear OK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gate way Primar y DNS Secondary DNS Is Setting OK? Ye s No
59 SETUPS EN EN Proxy Setting 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂProxy SettingâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. ⢠F or default setting s, select âÂÂDo Not UseâÂÂ. ⢠If you need to change the proxy sett ing as instructed by your Internet service provider to set the designat ed proxy addr ess and port, select âÂÂUse âÂÂ. If you select âÂÂUseâÂÂ, follow the following instructions to set the proxy address and proxy port. 2-a) Proxy address setting screen will appear. Enter proxy address. ⢠Th e k e ybo ard s cree n wi ll ap pe ar. After you enter all correctly, press [Yellow] to go to the proxy port setting screen. 2-b) Enter proxy port number with number buttons. 2-c) After you enter all correctly, Press [Yellow] . ⢠Confirmation message will appear . S elect â Y esâ to complet e the settings. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Connection Speed You can set connection speed as your preference. (The default setting is âÂÂAut oâÂÂ.) 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂConnection SpeedâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct the desired setting, then press [OK]. âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Set the appropriate connection speed automatically, in accordance with your network environment. âÂÂ10BASE HalfâÂÂ: Set the connection spe ed to âÂÂ10BASE HalfâÂÂ. âÂÂ10BASE FullâÂÂ: Set the connection spe ed to âÂÂ10BASE FullâÂÂ. âÂÂ100BASE HalfâÂÂ: Set the connection spee d to âÂÂ100BASE HalfâÂÂ. âÂÂ100BASE FullâÂÂ: Set the connection spee d to âÂÂ100BASE FullâÂÂ. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. [ K / L / s / B] : Move the highligh t. [the Number buttons] : Enter number. [OK] : Enter the highlighted number / word. * [Red] : C lear the en tered number or word. [Green] : Clear all the entered numbers or words. [Blue] : Switch betw een abc, ABC and @!? * [Yellow] : Set the en tered number or wor d. * These buttons can be used in other network settings. 1 a k u 2 b l v 3 c m w 4 d n x 5 e o y 6 f p z 7 g q . 8 h r - 9 i s _ 0 j t OK xxxxxxxx_ Proxy Setting Proxy Address Clear All Clear OK a/A/@ x Proxy Setting Proxy P or t Clear OK xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx Proxy Address Proxy P or t Is Setting OK? Ye s No Note ⢠The range of input numbers for the port number is between 0 and 65535. (If you enter a number larger than 65535, it will be regarded as 65535.) ⢠For pr oxy por t, cer tain por ts might be closed, blocked or unusable depending on your network environment. Note ⢠Choo se a con nec tion s peed i n accordan ce with your network environment. ⢠The network connection may be disabled depending on the device, when the settings are changed . Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
60 SETUPS EN BD-Live Setting You can limit Internet access for BD-Live discs. (The default setting is âÂÂAllowâÂÂ.) 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. âÂÂAllowâÂÂ: Internet access is permitted for all BD-Live contents. âÂÂLimited AllowâÂÂ: Internet access is permitted only for BD-Live contents which have content owner certificates. Internet access without the certificates is prohibited. âÂÂProhibitâÂÂ: Internet access is prohibit ed for all BD-Live contents. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Network Status You can check the sta tus of network settings. 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNetwork StatusâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Network setting list will be displayed. ⢠MA C address of th is unit will be displ ayed in the list . 2) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. If you connect this unit to the network wirelessly, select âÂÂWireless Connectionâ and set up necessary settings. Wireless Router In order to use a wireless network, you m ust set up the connection to the wireless router. Find wireless network Search for wireless networks automatically and select the wireless network name (SSID) from the list. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂWireless ConnectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂWireless RouterâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂFind wireless networkâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠This unit will star t searching for wireless networks automatically . 5) The list of wireless networks will be displayed. Use [ K / L ] to select the appropriate wireless network name (SSID), then press [OK]. 6) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct the authentication setting of the selected wireless network. ⢠F or a wireless network with authentication setting, select the authentication setting , according to the security t ype of the wireless network . ⢠F or a wireless network without authentication setting , select âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. âÂÂNoneâÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. âÂÂWEPâÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂWEPâÂÂ. âÂÂWPA-PSK (TKIP)âÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂWPA-P SK (TKIP)âÂÂ. âÂÂWPA-PSK (AES)âÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂWPA-P SK (AES)âÂÂ. âÂÂWPA2-PSK (TKIP)âÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂW PA2-PSK (TKIP)âÂÂ. âÂÂWPA2-PSK (AES)âÂÂ: Set the authentication sett ing to âÂÂWPA2-PSK (AES)âÂÂ. ⢠If you select â WEPâÂÂ, â WP A-PSK ( TKIP)âÂÂ, â WP A-PSK (AES)âÂÂ, âÂÂWP A2-PSK ( TKIP)â or â WP A2-PSK (AES)âÂÂ, âÂÂWEP/ WP A K ey â entry screen will ap pear . Enter the WEP/WP A key of the selec ted wireless network u sing cursor button s, number butt ons and color key , then press [Yellow] . ⢠Confirmation message will appear. Select âÂÂY esâ to complete the setti ngs. Wireless Connection Settings | ... | Wireless Router Find wireless network AP1 None WEP WP A-PSK (TKIP) WP A2-PSK (TKIP) WP A2-PSK (AES) WP A-PSK (AES) AP2 AP3 AP4 AP5 AP6 AP7 AP8 Page Down WEP/WP A Authentication 1 a k u 2 b l v 3 c m w 4 d n x 5 e o y 6 f p z 7 g q . 8 h r - 9 i s _ 0 j t OK a/A/@ WEP/WP A Authentication WEP/WP A K ey Clear All Clear OK SSID AP1 WP A2-PSK (AES) Is Setting OK? Ye s No xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx... WEP/WP A Authentication WEP/WP A K ey
61 SETUPS EN EN 7) Following screen will appear. Use [ s / B ] to select "Yes", then press [OK] to go to âÂÂAdvanced SettingsâÂÂ. ⢠F or furt her operation, ref er to â Advanced Settingsâ on page 61. ⢠T o go back to the home menu, press [( h o m e ) ] . Manually enter your SSID Set up the connection to the wireless rou ter manually by entering the wireless network name (SSID). 1) Follow steps 1) to 3) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂManually enter your SSIDâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Wireless Router Name (SSID) entr y screen will appear . Enter the wireless network name (SSID) using curso r buttons, number buttons and color key , then press [Yellow] . 3) Follow steps 6) to 7) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. Wireless Router Status You can check the current status of âÂÂWireless Routerâ setting. 1) Follow steps 1) to 3) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂWireless Router StatusâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The list of current wireless router setting will be display ed. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Advanced Settings After you set up th e âÂÂWireless Routerâ setting, set the network setting to âÂÂStandardâ (wireless) or âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wireless). Standard (wireless) To set the network setting to âÂÂStandardâÂÂ(wirel ess), follow the following proced ure. For details of this se tting, refer to âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâ in step 7) of âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61, skip to step 3). 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂFind wirel ess networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂAdvanced SettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂStandardâÂÂ, then press [OK]. Manual (wireless) To set the network setting to âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wirele ss), follow the following procedure. ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâ in step 7) of âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61, skip to step 3). 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂAdvanced SettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂManualâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠For details of each setting, ref er to following pages. âÂÂIP Address Settingâ / âÂÂDNS SettingâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂIP Address Setting / DNS Settingâ on page 58. âÂÂProxy SettingâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂProxy Settingâ on page 59. âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂBD-Live Settingâ on page 60. âÂÂNetwork StatusâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂNetwork Statusâ on page 60. Deactivates all the netw ork connection and settin gs. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂDisableâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Note ⢠F or a wireless net work with authentication setting , key icon appears to the right hand of the wireless network n ame (SSID). ⢠Signal icon shows the strength of the signal. ⢠WEP/WP A key app ears as asterisks on the confirmation screen. ⢠The internal Wireless LAN supports following specifications. - Wireless standards : IEEE 802.11 b/g/n - Frequency spectrum : 2.4GHz - Security protocol : WEP / WPA / WPA2 Network Connection Wireless router settings are incomplete. Please use "Advanced Settings" to complete your setup. Yes No 1 a k u 2 b l v 3 c m w 4 d n x 5 e o y 6 f p z 7 g q . 8 h r - 9 i s _ 0 j t OK a/A/@ Manually enter your SSID Wireless Router Name (SSID) Clear All Clear OK Note ⢠Y ou cannot select â Advanced Settingsâ if âÂÂWireless Router â setting is not completed. Disable Note ⢠The network connection can be reactivated by setting the network connection t o â Wired C onnec tionâ or âÂÂWireless C onnect ion âÂÂ. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
62 SETUPS EN This unit supports Philips Ea syLink, which enables your TV (limited to PHILIPS brand EasyLink TV) to act in conjunction with this unit, or vice versa. Compliant TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT jack. When âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CEC)â setting is set to âÂÂOnâÂÂ, functions listed below will be available. One Touch Play When the operations with following buttons of the remote control of th is unit are performed, the TV will automatically be turned on and switched to the appropriate input channel. Buttons for one touch play: - [ B (play)] , [ S (previous)] , [ T (next)] , [the Number buttons] , [( h o m e ) ] , or [INFO ] - [TOP MENU] , or [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] (when a disc is inserted in the unit) Standby When you press and hold [ Q (standby/on)] for 2 seconds, it turns off the power of the TV first and then turns off the power of this unit also. System Information Get & Set Menu Language The unit recognizes the OSD language set for the TV and automatically sets the same language as the player menu language (OSD menu language) for this unit. Refer to the âÂÂPlayer Menu â on pa ge 45 for available languag es. ⢠This feature is av ailabl e only when â Auto â is selec ted in the âÂÂPlayer Menu â in the settings menu. Philips continuously tries to improve its products and we strongly recommend that you upgrade the software when upgrades are available. New software can be down loaded from our web site at www.philips.com using the type number of your Blu-ray Disc P layer (e.g. BDP7520) to find information. You can upgrade the software by using disc. 1) Follow st ep 1) in âÂÂConnection Testâ on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂOthersâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSoftware UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂDisc UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 5) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 6) Disc tray will open automatically. ⢠Inser t th e disc for softwa re upgrade and then press [ A (open/close)] . 7) After completing load ing disc, confirmation message will appear. Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂYesâ and press [OK] to start upgrading. ⢠It may take a while to complete the upgrad ing. 8) After the disc upgrade finishes, this unit will restart and open the disc tray au tomatically. Remove the disc. You can upgrade the software by connecting the unit to the Internet. 1) Follow st ep 1) in âÂÂConne ction Testâ on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂOthersâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSoftware UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to sel ect âÂÂNetwork UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 5) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠This unit will then star t checki ng for the latest software version. 6) Confirmation message will appear. Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The unit will star t downloading the latest software versio n. 7) When the download co mpletes, confirmation message will appear. Press [OK]. ⢠The unit will star t upgrading the software version. ⢠It may take a while to complete the upgrad ing. 8) After upgrading finishes, this unit will restart and open the disc tray automatically. EasyLink (HDMI CEC) home A âÂÂS ettingsâ A âÂÂOthersâ A âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CEC)â Software Upgrade home A âÂÂSet tingsâ A âÂÂOthersâ A âÂÂSoftware Upgradeâ Disc Upgrade Note ⢠Please visit ww w .philips.com to download the latest software version. Please read the software upgrade Read-me file carefully befo re per forming an upg rade using a disc. ⢠Please do not unplug the AC power cord while executing the âÂÂDisc Upgrade âÂÂ. ⢠All settings will remain the same even if you upgrade the software version. ⢠The version of Netflix will also be upg raded if newer version of Netflix is available when upg rading the softwar e. Network Upgrade Note ⢠In order to upgrade the software via th e Internet, you must connect the unit to the Internet an d set up necessar y settings. ⢠For the network connection, refer to â Connection to the Networkâ on page 20. ⢠For the network setup , refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 57. ⢠Please do not unplug the A C power cor d or LAN cable while executing the âÂÂNetwork Upgrade âÂÂ. ⢠All settings will remain the same even if you upgrade the software version. ⢠The disc tray will open automatically af ter upgrading finishes. This is not a malfunction. ⢠The version of Netflix will also be upg raded if newer version of Netflix is available when upg rading the softwar e.
63 SETUPS EN EN Menus to reset player settin gs, format SD card, local storage, clear network settings and deactivate Netflix or VUDU. 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSettingsâ in the home menu, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂFactory DefaultâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ: All the settings except for the âÂÂRatings Lockâ and âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ setting will be reset to default. âÂÂFormat SD Cardâ (Available only when an SD Memory Card is inserted): Initialize the SD Memory Card. âÂÂLocal StorageâÂÂ: Local storage for Player or SD card (Available only when an SD Memory Card is inserted) used for BD-Java will be initialized. âÂÂNetwork SettingsâÂÂ: Reset the network settin g to the default . âÂÂNetflix DeactivateâÂÂ: Deactivates the connection to Netflix. âÂÂVudu DeactivateâÂÂ: Deactivates the connectio n to VUDU. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Confirmation message will appear . Press [OK] to complete the setting. 5) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Reset to Factory Default home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂFactory Defaultâ Note ⢠Do not remove the SD Memory Card while ex ecuting the âÂÂFormat SD Cardâ or âÂÂLocal Storage â (SD card). It will damage the card. ⢠âÂÂF ormat SD Card â and âÂÂLocal Storageâ (SD card) ar e not available when a Blu-ray Disc is in the unit. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
EN 64 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Tip POWER No reaction to the remote control. Connect the product to the power outlet. Point the remote control at the product. Insert the batteries correctly. Insert new batteries in the remote control. No video signal on the display device. Turn on the TV. Set the TV to the correct external input. Select the correct video resolution using [HDMI] . Press and hold [ B (play)] on th e front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its default. No audio / video signal on the display device via HDMI cable. If the unit is connected to the una uth orized display device with an HDMI cable, the audio / video signa l may not be output. Perform an HDMI cable hotplug, wherein y ou disconnect the HDMI cable from the TV and this unit and then reconnect it to both the devices while they are powered on. Ensure that your HDMI cable is certified . No high-definition video signal on the TV. Does the disc contain high-definition video? High-definition video is not available when the disc does not contain it. Does the TV support high-definition video? High-definition video is not available when the TV does not support it. No 3D video on the TV . Check if your TV is 3D capable. Use HDMI 1.4 cable to co nnect the 3D capable TV. Set âÂÂ3D Outputâ to âÂÂAuto (XX)âÂÂ. (Refer to page 45.) Wear 3D glasses and make sure they are switched on and in sync with your TV. Check the battery level s of your glasses. Refer to your 3D TV 's user manual for more information. No audio signal from the loudspeakers of the TV. Assign the audio input of the TV to the corresponding video input. Ensure that the TV's speakers are turned on in the TV menu. Ensure that the TV speakers are not muted. No audio signal from the loudspeakers of the audio system. Turn on the audio system. Set the audio system to the correct external input. Increase the volume level of the audio system. GENERAL Cannot play back a disc. Make sure that the product supports the dis c. Check the region code of the disc. This unit sup ports following region codes. -BD : âÂÂAâ -DVD : âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ1â for BDP7520/F7 (U SA / Canada) âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ4â for BDP7520/F8 (Mexico) For DVD-RW/-R, make sure that the disc is finalized. Clean the disc. SD Memory Card cannot be read. The format of the card do es not match t hat accepted by this unit or the card is not compatible. Cannot play back JPEG files from a disc. Make sure that the disc was recorded in the UDF, ISO9660 or JOLIET format. Cannot play back MP3 files from a disc. Make sure that the disc was recorded in the UDF, ISO9660 or JOLIET format. Make sure that the bit rate of the MP3 files is between 112 and 320 kbps. Make sure that the s ample rate of the MP3 files is 32 kH z, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Cannot play back Windows Media⢠Audio files from a disc. Make sure that the sample rate of the Windows Media⢠Audio files is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Cannot play back DivXî files from a disc. Make sure that the file extension is .avi, .AVI, .divx or .DIVX. Ensure that the DivXî video on th e disc meets the DivXî p layback capabilities of this device outlined on page 27.
65 TROUBLESHOOTING EN EN Problem Tip GENERAL in the upper right hand corner of the TV screen. The operation is not possible. Buttons do not work or the unit stops responding. To completely reset the unit, press and hold [ Q (standby/on)] on the fro nt panel for 10 seconds to shut down the unit or unplu g the AC cord from the AC outlet for 5-10 seconds. Cannot find a JPEG file. Make sure that the select ed group (folder) does not contain more tha n 9,999 files for BD / DVD / SD card, and 999 f iles for CD. Make sure that the file extensio n is .jpg, .JPG, .jpeg or .JPEG . Cannot find an MP3 and Windows Media⢠Audio file. Make sure that the selected folder does not contain more tha n 9,999 files for BD / DVD / SD card, and 999 files for CD. Make sure that the file extension is .mp3 or .MP3 for M P3, and .wma or .WMA for Windows Media⢠Audio. Error message appears when I select â Auto â in the âÂÂPlayer MenuâÂÂ. Make sure that the unit is connected to the PHILIPS brand EasyLink TV an d the âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CE C)â is set to âÂÂOnâÂÂ. This error message may appear when your TVâÂÂs OSD language is not supported by this unit. Cannot connect to the network. Check if the network connection is properly made. Turn on the modem or router. Check the network settings. Check if the router and/or modem is correctly connected. Check the âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ. When connecting directly to a modem via a LAN cable, you might need to power cycle the modem to reset sett ings on the modem. Cannot use the wireless connection. Once you ha ve acti vated th e wirel ess connect ion pl ease wait 30 seconds for the conne ction to be establish ed after turning on th e unit, before tryin g to access network features such as BD -Live, DLNA, Netflix, CinemaNow, Blockbuster or VUDU. Cannot get into the PC's screen after âÂÂMediaConnectâ is selected. The startup screen (PHILIPS logo with spinning circle) keep displaying until the unit found the PC that is ru nni ng Philips Wi reless Media Connect. Make sure if the network connection is connected prop erly. Check if your PC runs Philips Wireless MediaConnect. Make sure your TV and PC are connected on the same network. Cannot connect to the n etwork while my PC is connected to the network. Check the content of your Internet serv ice contract to see if your Internet Service Provider prevents multiple terminals connecting at the same time. The capacity of the SD card decreased. Data may be written to the SD card when a BD-video that supports the virtual package is used and an SD card is in the slot. MPEG-2 video and audio on t he SD card cannot be played back. MPEG-2 is noncompliant on this unit. The contents of the card cannot be read. The card is not compatible or the co ntents on the card may be damaged. Turn off and then turn the unit on again. Cannot use the BD-Live function or download of data does not perform properly. Insert an SD card with enough capacity(1GB or more). Check if an SD card is correctly inserted. Make sure the write-protect switch on the SD card is not enabled. Cannot play back BD-video(BD- ROM Profile 2.0). Insert an SD card(1GB or more) which is formatted on this unit. Some discs with BD-Live function re quire memory when playing back the content. Do not remove the card during playback. Make sure the write-protect switch on the SD card is not enabled. Folder or files stored on DLNA home media server are not displayed in the file list or cannot be played back. Check the setting on your home media server. (Refer to the user manual of the home media server.) Check the network connection and settings. Cannot use Netflix fe ature. Netflix is av ailable only in the United States. Check if the network connection is properly made. Visit netflix.com/Philips on your PC and become a Netflix member. Cannot add movies or TV episodes to the instant Queue. Visit netflix.com on your PC. Adding movies or TV episodes on this unit is not available. Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
66 TROUBLESHOOTING EN To obtain an el ectronic copy of this manual : 1) Point your browser to www.philips.com/suppo rt. 2) Choose your country of location. 3) Enter the model number or a keyword in the âÂÂFind your pr oductâ field. Alternatively, you can browse the catalog. 4) Click the description or model. 5) Under Product support, clic k âÂÂUser manualsâ . If you cannot resolve your problem, refer to the FAQ for this Blu-ray Disc Player at www.philips.com/support . If the problem remains unresolved, contact th e Customer Support Center in your country. Problem Tip GENERAL Even though the speed of the Internet connection improves during playback, the picture quality of Netflix streaming movie does not improve. The picture quality does not change during playback. The picture quality differs depending on the speed of Internet connection at the time of loading. The picture quality of streaming movie (Netflix, CinemaNow or Blockbuster) is poor. Check the speed of your Internet connection. Streaming movie (Netflix, CinemaNow or Blockbuster) often stops or start buffering during playback. Contact your Internet service provider. (You may need to improve the broadband speed.) Cannot use CinemaNo w / Blockbuster feature. Check if the network connection is properly made. Visit www.cinemanow.com/Login (C in e ma N ow ) or www.blockbuster.com/auth/login (Blockbuster) on your PC and create an account. Cannot use the VUDU service. Check if the network connection is properly made. Cannot rent or buy movies / TV shows on VUDU. You need to activate the VUDU account. (Refer to page 43) Log into your accoun t at http://my.vudu.com and check your payment information. The picture quality of VUDU movie is poor. Check the speed of your Internet connection. You need speeds of at least 8 Mbps to this player for high quality uninterrupted playback. VUDU movie often stops or starts buffering during playback. Contact your Internet service provider to troubleshoot your I nternet connection for speed and line q uality. Consistent line quality an d speed are very important for Internet video playback. Downloading an Electronic Copy Contact Us Note ⢠Do not attempt to repair the Blu-ray Disc Player y ourself. This ma y cause severe injury , irreparable damage to your Blu-ray Disc Pl ayer or void y our warranty . ⢠Please have available your Blu-ra y Disc Player model and serial number before contacting us. These numbers are available on the cabinet, as w ell as on the pack aging.
67 EN EN GLOSSARY Analog Audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also âÂÂDigital AudioâÂÂ. Aspect Ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the TV screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the TV screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). AVCHD AVCHD is a new format for high definition video camcorders which can record and p lay high-resolution HD images. BD-Live BD-Live is a BD-video (BD-ROM version 2 Pro file 2.0) which contains new functions (e.g. Internet connection), in addition to the BONUSVIEW funct ion. Blockbuster Blockbuster is online service which you can rent or purchase movies and TV episodes streamed over the Internet. Blu-ray Disc (BD) Blu-ray Disc is a next generation optical video disc which is capable of storing much more data than a conventional DVD. The large capacity makes it possible to benefit from the features such as high-definition videos, multi-channel surround sounds, interactive menus and so on. Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a BD-video or DVD-video is usually divided into chapters. See also âÂÂTitleâÂÂ. CinemaNow CinemaNow is online service which you can rent or purchase movies and TV episodes streamed over the Internet. Component Video Output Each signa l of lumi na nce (Y) and component (P B /CB , P R /CR ) is independent to output so that yo u can experience picture color as it is. Also, due to compatibility wi th progressive video (525p/ 480p), you can experience higher-density picture than that in interlace (525i/480i). Digital Audio An indirect representation of sound by nu mbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audi o) by an anal og-to- digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also âÂÂSampling Frequencyâ and âÂÂAnalog AudioâÂÂ. DivXî DivXî is a codec (compression/decompression) that can compress pictures to a very small amount of data. The software can compress video data from almost any devices to the size that can be sent on the Internet without compromising visual quality of the pictures. DLNA (Digital Living Network Al liance) DLNA is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics that formulates DLNA Interoperability Guidelines for sharing digital contents within a home network. DNS Server A server which translates Internet domain names into IP addresses. Dolby Digital The system to compress digital sound developed by Dolby Laboratories. It offers you s ound of stereo (2ch) or multi- channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the ne xt generation digital audio compression technology developed as an extension to Dolby Digital. Blu-ray Disc supports 7.1 multi-channel surround sound outp ut. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a lossless coding technology developed for next generation optical discs. Blu-ray Disc supports 7.1 multi-chan nel surround sound outp ut. DTSî (Digital Theater System) DTSî is a multi channel su rround sound system. You can enjoy movie dynamic and realistic sound like movie theater. DTS surround sound technologies were developed by DTS, Inc. DTS-HDî DTS-HDî is a lossless coding technology developed as an extension of the original DT S Coherent Acoustics format. Blu-ray Disc supports 7.1 multi-channel surround sound output. Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
68 GLOSSARY EN Gateway IP address of the electronic devices (such as router) which provide Internet access. HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) A digital interface between audio and video source. It can transmit component video, audio, and control signal with one cable connection. Hub A device used for connecting multiple device to the network. IP Address A set of numbers which are assigned to devices participating in a computer network. JPEG (Joint Photogra phic Ex perts Group) JPEG is a method of compressin g still picture files. You can copy JPEG files on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R or SD Memory Card from a computer and play back the files on this unit. LAN (Local Area Network) A group of computer networks covering a small area like a company, school or home. Local Storage A storage area of sub contents for playing virtual packages on BD-video. MP3 (MPEG audio la yer 3) MP3 is a method of compressing files. You can copy MP3 files on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R or SD Memory Card from the computer and play back t he files on this unit. Netflix Netflix is online movie rental service, offering online streaming to customers in the United States. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CD and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers wit h digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPE G audio to PCM. See also âÂÂDigital AudioâÂÂ. Proxy Server Proxy server is a server which acts as an intermediary between a workstation user an d the Internet to ensure security. Region Code Regions associate discs and players w ith particular areas of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Router A networking device which distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device and routing and forwarding information in the computer network. Sampling Frequency The rate which sound is measur ed by a specified interval to turn into digital audio data. The nu mbers of sampling in one second defines as sampling frequency. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality. Subnet Mask A mask which is used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. Title A collection of chapters on BD-video or DVD-video. See also âÂÂChapterâÂÂ. Track Audio CD uses tracks to divide up the content of a disc. The BD-video or DVD-video equi valent is called a chapter. See also âÂÂChap terâÂÂ. Virtual Package The function which copies data to other media (local storage) from the Internet and plays secondary video, secondary audio and subtitles at the same time. The method of the playback varies depending on discs. VUDU VUDU is a leading HD on-demand video service which utilizes the Internet connection to deliver the highest quality on-demand video and Internet applications. Windows Media⢠Audio Windows Media⢠Audio is the audio compressing technology developed by Microsoft. You can copy Windows Media⢠Audio files on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R or SD Memory Card from a comput er and play them back on this unit. x.v.Color âÂÂx.v.Colorâ is a promotion name given to the products that have the capability to realize a wide color space based on the xvYCC specifications and is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
69 EN EN SPECIFICATIONS General Signal System NTSC Color Power requirements 120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption 17 W (standby: 0.5 W) Dimensions (width x height x depth) 17.2 x 2.0 x 8.5 inches (435 x 50 x 215 mm) Weight 4.6 lbs. (2.1 kg) Operating temperature 41ðF (5ðC) to 104ðF (40ðC) Operating humidity Less than 80 % (no condensation) Terminals Front SD card slot slot x 1 Rear Audio output (Anal og) RCA jack x 2 L/R: 2 Vrms (out put impeda nce: more than 1k ⦠) Video output RCA jack x 1 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Component vi deo output RCA jack x 3 Y: 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠)P B /CB : 700 mVp-p (75 ⦠)P R /CR : 700 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Audio output (Digital) RCA jack x 1 500 mVp-p (75 ⦠) HDMI output HDMI jack x 1 Video: 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24/Audio LAN terminal 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Wireless LAN (Internal) IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Note ⢠The specifications and design of this pr oduct are subje c t to ch ange without not ice. Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
EN 70 NETWORK SERVICE DISCLAIMER Network Service Disclaimer Content and services made av ailable through this product are transmitted by third par ties by means of networks and transmission facilities o ver which Compan y has no control and third party ser vices may be terminated or interrupted at an y time, and Compan y makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain av ailable for an y period of time. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer , Company expressly disclaims an y responsibility for any int erruption or suspension of any cont ent or ser vice made available thr ough this product. Compan y is not responsible for cust omer ser vice related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the cont ent or ser vices should be made directly to the respective content and service providers. THIRD P ART Y CONTENT AND SERVICES MADE A V AILABLE THROUGH THIS PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED â AS IS.â C OMP ANY DOES NO T W ARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED , FOR ANY PURPOSE WHA TSOEVER. C OMP ANY EXPRESSL Y DISCLAIMS ANY W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCL UDING WITHOUT LIMIT A TION, W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILIT Y OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE , ACCURA CY , V ALIDIT Y , TIMELINESS, LEGALIT Y , SUIT ABILIT Y , OR QU ALIT Y OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE A V AILABLE THROUGH THIS PRODUCT . IN NO EVENT SHALL COMP ANY BE LIABLE FOR, ANY DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN C ONTRACT OR TORT , INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMIT A TION, ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, L OST PROFITS, A T TORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY O THER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF , OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY CONTENT (OR ANY INFORMA TION CONT AINED THEREIN) OR SER VICE PROVIDED TO THE USER OR ANY THIRD P ART Y , E VEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. All content and services accessible through this product belong to third parties and are protected by c opyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellec tual propert y rights. Such content and services are provided solely f or the User â s personal noncommercial use . User may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the cont ent owner or ser vice provider . Without limiting the foregoing , unless expressly authorized by the applicable cont ent owner or ser vice provider , you ma y not modify , copy , republish, upload , post, transmit, translate , sell, create deriv ative works , exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium an y content or ser vices made av ailable through this product.
71 EN EN IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY IN FORMATION FOR 3D TELEVISIONS Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup Ambient fluorescent lighting ma y cause a flickering effec t and direct sunlight may adv ersely affect the operation of your 3D glasses. 1. Read the following inf ormation before viewing 3D television images . DO NO T place your television near open stairwells, balconies or other objects as viewing in 3D images may cause disorientation f or some viewers resulting in falls, tripping or walking into objec ts. 2. If you experience (1) alter ed vision; (2) lightheadedness; (3) dizziness; (4) inv oluntar y movements such as ey e or muscle twitching; (5) confusion; (6) nausea; (7) loss of awareness; (8) convulsions; (9) cramps; and/or (10) disorientation, immediately stop watching 3D images and consult y our doc tor . 3. P arents should regularly monitor their children c oncerning the above symptoms as children and teenagers ma y be more likely to experience these symptoms more frequently than adults. W atching 3D television is not recommended f or children under the age of 6 as their visual system is not yet fully dev eloped. 4. Pr olonged viewing of 3D images might cause discomfort, dizziness, eye strain, headaches or disorientation. 5. CA UTION NO TICE: Some viewers may experienc e an epileptic seizure or stroke when exposed to certain flashing images or lights contained in cer tain television pictures or video games. If you or any of y our family has a histor y of epilepsy or stroke, please consult your doctor bef ore viewing 3D images. 1. DO NO T watch 3D television if you are pr egnant, elderly , sleep-deprived , suffering from serious medical conditions , in poor physical c ondition or under the influence of alcohol. 2. Sitting too close to the screen f or an extended period of time may damage your eyesight. The ideal distance should be at least three times the height of the T V screen and at the viewer's eyes lev el. 3. W earing the 3D glasses for an y reason other than viewing 3D television (as general spectacles, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.) ma y physically harm you or w eaken your eyesight. 4. If you experience an y discomfort while viewing 3D images, stop and do not immediately engage in any pot entially hazardous activit y such as driving a car until your symptoms ha ve disappeared . If your symptoms persist, do not resume watching 3D images without consulting y our doc tor . 5. W ARNING NOTICE:
EN 72 ONE (1) YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTY COVERAGE: This warranty obligation is limited to the terms set forth below. WHO IS COVERED: Th i s product is warranted to the original purchaser or the per- son receiving the product as a gift against defects in materials and workmanship as based on the date of original purchase (âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ) from an Authorized Dealer. The original sales receipt showing the product name and the purchase date from an authorized retailer is considered such proof. WHAT IS COVERED: This warranty covers new products if a defect in material or workmanship occurs and a valid claim is received within the Warranty Period. At its option, the company will either (1) repair the product at no charge, using new or refurbished replacement parts, or (2) exchange the product with a product that is new or which has been manufactured from new, or ser- viceable used parts and is at least functionally equivalent or most comparable to the original product in current inventory, or (3) refund the original purchase price of the product. The Company warrants replacement products or parts provided under this warranty against defects in materials and workmanship from the date of the replacement or repair for ninety (90) days or for the remaining portion of the original productâÂÂs warranty, whichever provides longer coverage for you. When a product or part is exchanged, any replacement item becomes your property and the replaced item becomes the companyâÂÂs property. When a refund is given, your product becomes the companyâÂÂs property. Note: Any product sold and identified as refurbished or renewed carries a ninety (90) day limited warranty. Replacement product can only be sent if all warranty requirements are met. Failure to follow all requirements can result in delay. WHAT IS NOT COVERED - EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS: This Limited Warranty applies only to the new products that can be identified by the trademark, trade name, or logo affixed to it. This Limited Warranty does not apply to any non-Philips hardware product or any software, even if packaged or sold with the product. Non-Philips manufacturers, suppliers, or publishers may provide a separate warranty for their own products packaged with the bundled product. The Company is not liable for any damage to or loss of any programs, data, or other information stored on any media contained within the product, or any non-Philips product or part not covered by this warranty. Recovery or reinstallation of programs, data or other information is not covered under this Limited Warranty. This warranty does not apply (a) to damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, neglect, misapplication, or non-Philips product, (b) to damage caused by service performed by anyone other than an Authorized Service Location, (c) to a product or a part that has been modified without written permission, or (d) if any serial number has been removed or defaced, or (e) product, accessories or consumables sold âÂÂAS ISâ without warranty of any kind by including refurbished Philips product sold âÂÂAS ISâ by some retailers. This Limited Warranty does not cover: ⢠Shipping charges to return defective product. ⢠Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjust- ment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna/signal source systems outside of the product. ⢠Product repair and/or part replacement because of improper installation or maintenance, connections to improper voltage supply, power line surge, lightning damage, retained images or screen markings resulting from viewing fixed stationary con- tent for extended periods, product cosmetic appearance items due to normal wear and tear, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of the company. ⢠Damage or claims for products not being available for use, or for lost data or lost software. ⢠Damage from mishandled shipments or transit accidents when returning product. ⢠A product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. ⢠A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes). ⢠Product lost in shipment and no signature verification receipt can be provided. ⢠Failure to operate per OwnerâÂÂs Manual. TO OBTAIN ASSISTANCE IN THE U.S.A., CANADA, PUERTO RICO, OR U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact Customer Care Center at: 1-866-309-0866 This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. P&F USA, Inc. PO Box 430 Daleville, IN 47334-0430 WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR THE CON- SUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDEN- TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PROD- UCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY. Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
73 EN EN MEMO Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
Meet Philips at the Internet http://www.philips.com/welcome P&F USA, Inc. PO Box 430 Daleville, IN 47334-0430 IMPORTADOR: Sojitz Mexicana, S.A. de C.V. Av. Paseo de las Palmas no. 239-302 Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, c.p. 11000 México, D.F. 52 (55) 5202 - 7222 P&F Mexicana, S.A. de C.V. Av. La Palma No. 6, Col. San Fernando La Herradura, Huixquilucan Edo. de México C.P. 52787 EXPORTADOR : FUNAI ELECTRIC CO. L.T.D. PaÃÂs de Origen : CHINA Comercializado por : P&F Mexicana, S.A. DE C.V. LEA CUIDADOSAMENTE ESTE INSTRUCTIVO GARANTIA INCLUIDA EN EL INSTRUCTIVO DE USO ANTES DE USAR SU APARATO. ENERGIA BDP7520 120 V ~ 60 Hz 17 W Printed in China JpnYN-1043/F7-3 1VMN30256A â â â â E5VK6UD Philips and Philips Shield are used under license of K oninklijke Philips Electronics N.V .
EN 2 PRECAUTIONS Registering your model with PHILIPS makes you eligible for all of the valuable beneîÂÂts listed below, so don't miss out. Complete and return your Product Registration Card at once, or register online at ww w .philips.com/welc ome to ensure: Return your Product Registra tion Car d or register online at ww w .philips.com/w elcome today to get the very most from your purchase. Know these safety symbols CA UTION: T O REDUCE THE RISK OF ELEC TRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO US ER -S ERVICEABLE P ARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. CA UTION RISK OF ELEC TRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN *Proof of Pur chase Returning the enclosed card guar- antees that your date of purchase will be on îÂÂle, so no additional paperwork will be required from you to obtain warranty service. *Product Safety NotiîÂÂcation By registering your product, you'll receive notiîÂÂcation - dir ec tly from the manufac turer - in the rare case of a produc t recall or safety defect. *Additional BeneîÂÂts Registering your product guar- antees that youâÂÂll receive all of the privileges to which y ou're entitled, including special money- saving oîÂÂers. Congratulations on y our purchase, and welcome to the âÂÂfamily!â Dear PHILIPS product owner: Thank you for your conîÂÂdence in PHILIPS. Y ouâÂÂve selected one of the best-built, best- backed produc ts available today . W e âÂÂll do everything in our power to keep you happy with your purchase for many years to come. As a member of the PHILIPS âÂÂfamily , â you âÂÂre entitled to protection by one of the most comprehensive warranties and outstanding service networks in the industr y. Whatâ s more, your purchase guarantees youâÂÂll receiv e all the information and special oîÂÂers for which you qualify , plus easy access to accessories from our convenient home shopping net work. Most impor tantly , you can count on our uncompromising commitment to your total satisfaction. All of this is our way of saying welcome - and thanks for investing in a PHILIPS product. P .S. T o get the most from y our PHILIPS purchase , be sure to complete and return your Product Registra tion Card at once, or register online at: ww w .philips.com/w elcome F or Customer Use Please write the model and serial number of your unit (located on the cabinet) in the space below for future reference. Model No. _______________________________________ Serial No. _______________________________________ Visit our World Wide W eb Site at http://w w w .philips.com/w elcome The symbol for CLASS ll (Double Insulation) This âÂÂbolt of lightningâ indicates uninsulated material within your unit may cause an electrical shock. For the safety of everyone in your household, please do not remove product covering. The âÂÂexclamation pointâ calls attention to features for which you should read the enclosed literature closely to prevent operating and maintenance problems. W ARNING : To reduce the risk of îÂÂre or electric shock, this apparatus should not be exposed to rain or moisture, and objects îÂÂlled with liquids, such as vases, should not be placed on this apparatus. : N O I T U A C T o prevent electric shock , match wide blade of . t r e s n i y l l u f , t o l s e d i w o t g u l p : N O I T N E T T A Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la îÂÂche dans la borne c orrespondante de . d n o f u a â u q s u j r e s s u o p t e e s i r p a l The important note and rating are located on the rear or bottom of the cabinet.
3 PRECAUTIONS EN EN FCC WARNING This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modiîÂÂcations are expressly approved in the manual. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modiîÂÂcation is made. RADIO-TV INTERFERENCE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment oî and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1) Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2) Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 3) Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit diîÂÂerent from that to which the receiver is connected. 4) Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Disconnect the mains plug to shut oî when îÂÂnd trouble or not in use. The mains plug shall remain readily operable. IMPORT ANT SAFETY INSTRUC TIONS 1. Read these instructions. 2. Keep these instructions. 3. Heed all warnings. 4. Follow all instructions. 5. Do not use this apparatus near water. 6. Clean only with dry cloth. 7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturerâÂÂs instructions. 8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including ampliîÂÂers) that produce heat. 9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not îÂÂt into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11. Only use attachments/accessories speciîÂÂed by the manufacturer. 12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table speciîÂÂed by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14. Refer all servicing to qualiîÂÂed service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. WARNING: Batteries (Battery pack or battery installed) shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, îÂÂre, or the like. LASER SAFETY This apparatus employs a laser. Only a qualiîÂÂed service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this apparatus, due to possible eye injury. CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those speciîÂÂed herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CAUTION: Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into beam. LOCATION: Inside, near the BD mechanism. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
4 PRECAUTIONS EN Do not place the unit on the furniture that is capable of being tilted by a child and an adult leaning, pulling, standing or climbing on it. A falling unit can cause serious injury or even death. To Avoid the Hazards of Electrical Shock and Fire Do not handle the AC power cord with wet hands. Do not pull on the AC power cord when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Grasp it by the plug. Do not put your îÂÂngers or objects into the unit. Location and Handling Do not install the unit in direct sunlight, near strong magnetic îÂÂelds, or in a place subject to dust or strong vibration. Avoid a place with drastic temperature changes. Install the unit in a horizontal and stable position. Do not place anything directly on top or bottom of the unit. Depending on your external devices, noise or disturbance of the picture and/or sound may be generated if the unit is placed too close to them. In this case, please ensure enough space between the external devices and the unit. Depending on the environment, the temperature of this unit may increase slightly. This is not a malfunction. Be sure to remove the disc and unplug the AC power cord from the outlet before carrying the unit. Dew Condensation Warning Dew condensation may form inside the unit in the following conditions. If so, do not use this unit at least for a few hours until its inside gets dry. - The unit is moved from a cold place to a warm place. - Under conditions of high humidity. - After heating a cold room. Notice for Progressive Scan Output Consumers should note that not all high deîÂÂnition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In case of picture problems with 525(480) progressive scan output, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the âÂÂstandard deîÂÂnitionâ output. If there are questions regarding your TV set compatibility with this 525p(480p) BD / DVD player, please contact our customer service center. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠IMPORTANT COPYRIGHT INFORMATION Unauthorized copying, broadcasting, public performance and lending of discs are prohibited. This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited. ENERGY STAR î is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy eîÂÂcient products and practices.
5 PRECAUTIONS EN EN ⢠Please refer to r elevant topics on â T ROUBLESHOOTINGâ on page 64 before returning the product. ⢠If you need to call a customer service representative, please know the model numbe r and serial number of your product befor e you call. This inf ormation is displayed on the back of the product. Also , please take a moment to identify the problem you are ha ving, and be prepared to explain this to the repr esentative. If you believe the repr esentative will need to help you with operations, please stay near the product. Our representatives will be happy to assist you. F or onlin e refer ence, please visit our w eb site at http://www.philips.c om/welcome ⢠Wipe the front panel and other ex terior sur faces of the unit with a soft cloth. ⢠Never use a solvent, thinner , benzene or alcohol to clean the unit. Do not spra y insect icide liqui d near the unit. Such chemicals may discolor the surface or damage the unit. ⢠When a disc becomes dir ty, clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc fr om the center to out. Do not wipe in a circular motion. ⢠Do not use solvents such as benzine , thinner , commercially available cleaners, deter gent, abrasive cleaning agents or antistatic spray intended for analog records. ⢠I f this uni t still does not pe r form properl y although you refer to the rel evant sec tions and to â TROUBLESHOOTING â in this user ma nual, the lase r optical pi ckup unit may be dirt y . Consult your dealer or an A uthorized Service Center for inspection and cle aning of the laser optical pickup unit. ⢠Handle the discs so that fingerprints and dust do not adhere to the surfaces of the discs. ⢠Always store the disc in its prot ec tive case when it is not used. ⢠Note that discs with special shapes (hear t-shaped discs, octagonal discs, etc.) cannot be played back on this unit. Do not attempt to play such d iscs, as they may damage the unit. 2010 é Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. All rights reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. or their resp ective owners. Philips reserves the right to change product s at any time without being obliged to adjust earlie r supplies accordingly. The material in this manual is believed adequate for the intended use of the system. If the product, or its individual modules or proc edures, are us ed for purposes other than those specified herein, confirmation of their validity and suitability must be obtained . Philips warrants that the material itself does not infringe any United States patents. No further warranty is expressed or implied. Philips cannot be held responsible neither for any errors in the content of this document nor for any problems as a result of the content in this document. Errors reported to Philips will be adapted and pub lished on the Philips support website as soon as possible. No components are user serviceable. Do not open or remove covers to the inside of the product. Repairs may only be done by Philips Service Centers and official repai r shops. Failure to do so shall void any warranty, stated or implied. Any operation expressly prohib ited in this manual, any adjustments, or assembly procedures not recommended or authorized in this manual shall void the warranty. Maintenance Servicing Cleaning the Cabinet Cleaning Discs Cleaning the Disc Lens Disc Handling Notice Warranty Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
6 PRECAUTIONS EN Registering your model with Ph ilips makes you eligible for all of the valuable benefits listed below, so donâÂÂt miss out. Complete and return your Prod uct Registration Card at once, or register online at www.philips.com/welcome to ensure : Proof of Purchase Returning the enclosed card gu arantees that your date of purchase is on file, so no additional paperwork is require d from you to obtain warranty service. Product Safety Notification By regist ering your pr oduct you receive notification - directly from the manufacturer - in the rare case of a product recall or safety defect. Additional Benefits of Product Ownership Registering your product guarantees that you receive all of the privileges to which youâÂÂre entitled, including special money-saving offers. For further as sistance For further assistance, call the customer support service in your country. ⢠T o obtain assistance in the U.S.A., Canada, Puerto Rico, or the U.S . Virgin Islands, contact Philips Customer Care Center at 1-866-309-0866 The packaging of this product is intended to be recycled. Contact your lo cal authorities for information about how to recycle the packaging. End of life directives Philips pays a lot of at tention to produce environment- friendly products in green focal areas. Your new Blu-ray Disc Player contains materia ls which can be recycled and reused. At the end of its life, specialized companies can dismantle the discarded Blu - ray Disc Player to concentrate the reusable materials and to minimize the amount of materials to be disposed of. Please ensure you dispose of your old Blu-ray Disc Player according to local regulations. Disposal of used batteries The bat teries supp lied do not contain the heavy metals mercury and cadmium. Nevertheless, in many areas batteries may not be disposed of with your house hold waste. Please ensure you dispose of batteries accordi ng to local regulations. ⢠Remote Control ⢠Batteries (AAA, 1.5V x 2) â¢U s e r M a n u a l â¢Q u i c k S t a r t G u i d e ⢠Quick Set-up for Philips Wireless MediaConnect ⢠Registration card â¢B o x - i n s e r t s ⢠RCA audio / video cab les Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,392,195; 7,272,567; 7,333,929; 7,212,872 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD, DTS- HD Master Audio | Essential and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includ es software. é DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimed ia Interface are trad emarks or registered tr ademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other c ountries. Important Environmental Care Supplied Accessories Trademark Information
7 PRECAUTIONS EN EN âÂÂx.v.Colorâ and âÂÂx.v.Colorâ logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation. Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. DivXî, DivX Certifiedî and associated logos are re gistered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. âÂÂAVCHDâ and the âÂÂAVCHDâ logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation. âÂÂBONUSVIEWâ is trademark of Blu-ray Disc Association. âÂÂBD-Liveâ and âÂÂBD-Liveâ logo are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. DLNAî, the DL NA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIEDî are trademarks, service marks, o r certification marks of the Digital Liv ing Network Alliance. Netflix and the Netflix logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Netflix, Inc. BLOCKBUSTER name, design and related marks are trademarks of Blockbuster Inc. VUDU⢠is a trademark of VUDU, Inc. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. é 2010 Sonic Soluti ons. Roxio, CinemaNow, Roxio CinemaNow and the Roxio CinemaNow logos are trademarks or registere d trademarks ow ned by Sonic Solution s in the United States and other jurisdictions. âÂÂBlu-ray 3Dâ and âÂÂBlu-ray 3Dâ logo are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. âÂÂBlu-ray DiscâÂÂ, âÂÂBlu-rayâ and âÂÂBlu-ray Discâ logo are trademarks of Blu-ray Disc Association. Kodak and KODAK Picture CD Compatible are trademarks of Kodak used under license. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
EN 8 CONTENTS Introduction Precautions ................................................................... 2 Maintenance ...............................................................................5 Notice ............................................................................................5 Important .....................................................................................6 Supplied Accessories ...............................................................6 Trademark Information ...........................................................6 Features ........................................................................ 9 Features ........................................................................................9 Product Info .............................................................................. 10 Symbols Used in this User Manual .... ............................... 10 Functional Overview .................................................. 11 Front Panel ................................................................................ 11 Rear Panel .................................................................................. 11 Remote Control ........................................ ............................... 12 Front Panel Display ................................. ............................... 14 Guide to On-Screen Display ............................................... 15 Connections Connections ................................................................ 16 Connection to the TV ............................................................ 16 Connection to an Audio System ........ ............................... 19 Connection to the Network ................................................ 20 Basic Setup Before You Start ......................................................... 22 Finding the Viewing Channel on Your TV ..................... 22 Playback Information on Playback ........................................... 23 Information on Playback ...................................................... 23 Guide to File List ..................................................................... 25 How to Insert a Disc ............................................................... 25 Basic Playback ............................................................ 26 Playing Back a BD, DVD or a Disc with AVCHD Files ....... . 26 Playing Back an Audio CD or a Disc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Files .................. 27 Playing Back a Blu-ray 3D Disc ........................................... 29 KODAK Picture CD .................................................................. 29 Reading the SD Memory Card ........................................... 30 Playing Video / Mus ic / Photo Files from DLNA Certified Home Media Servers ............ ............................... 31 About DivXî and DivXî VOD .............................................. 32 Playing Back DivXî with DivX î External Subtitle ........ 33 Using the Title / Disc Menu .................. ............................... 33 Special Playback ......................................................... 34 Fast Forward / Fast Reverse ................................................ 34 Slow Forward Playback ........................................................ 34 Step by Step Playback .......................................................... 34 Zoom ........................................................................................... 34 Repeat Playback ....................................... ............................... 35 A-B Repeat ................................................................................ 35 Slide Show ................................................................................. 35 PiP (BONUSVIEW) Setting .................................................... 36 Enjoying BD-Live Discs with Internet .............................. 36 Title / Chapter Search ........................................................... 37 Track Search .............................................. ............................... 37 Time Search .............................................................................. 37 Switching Subtitles ................................. ............................... 38 Switching Audio Soundtrack ............................................. 38 Switching Camera Angles ................................................... 39 Philips Wireless MediaConnect .......... ............................... 39 Netflix Operations ................................................ ..... 40 Before Activating the Connection to Netflix ................. 40 Activating the Connection to Netflix ...............................40 Watching Streaming Movies ...............................................40 CinemaNow / Blockbuster Operations ..................... 41 Before Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster ...............................................................................41 Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster ...............................................................................41 Guide to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Menu Screen .....41 Renting or Purchasing Movies / TV episodes ................42 Searching Movies / TV episodes ........... .............................42 Watching Rented or Purchased Movies / TV episodes ..... . 42 VUDU Operations ....................................................... 43 Activating VUDU .....................................................................43 Guide to VUDU Menu Screen ................ .............................43 Renting or Purchasing VUDU Movies ..............................44 Watching Rented or Purchased VUDU movies ............44 Using Internet Applications ................................................44 Function Setup List of settings ............................................................ 45 Setups ......................................................................... 52 TV Shape .....................................................................................52 HDMI Video Resolution .........................................................52 HDMI Audio ...............................................................................53 Digital Out .................................................................................55 Ratings Lock ..............................................................................56 Network Connection .............................................................57 EasyLink (HDMI CEC) ................................. .............................62 Software Upgrade ...................................................................62 Reset to Factory Default .......................... .............................63 Others Troubleshooting ........................................................ 64 Downloading an Electronic Copy .....................................66 Contact Us .................................................................................66 Glossary ...................................................................... 67 Specifications ............................................................. 69 Network Service Disclaimer ...................................... 70 IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D TELEVISIONS ................................................. 71 ONE (1) YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY .......................... 72
9 EN EN FEATURES Congratulations on your purchase, and welcome to Philips! To fully benefit from the support that Philips offers, register your product at www.philips.com/welcome . Blu-ray Disc You can enjoy Blu-ray Disc wh ich is capable of storing five times more data than a conventional DVD. Playing back Blu-r ay 3D Disc This unit can play back Blu-ray 3D D iscs which contain stereoscopic 3D video. In order to enjoy 3D video, c onnect this unit to a 3D capable TV using an HDMI 1.4 cable. BD-Jav a With some BDs which support Java applications, you c an enjoy the interactive functions such as g ames or interactive menus. DVD upscaling for enhanced picture quality Your current DVD will look even better than before thanks to video upscaling. Upscaling will increase the resolution of standard definition DVD to high definition up to 1080p over an HDMI connection. The picture will be less jagged and mor e realistic for a near high definition experience. Enjoy your content on different kinds of media Full backwards compa tibility with DVD, CD and SD card ensures that you can continue to enj oy your current audio- video collection. Additionally, you can enjoy AVCHD / DivXî / MP3 / WMA / JPEG files. Listen to rich multi-channel surround so und Multi-channel surround sound, which realizes real-to-life sound and makes you feel th at you are really there. Intuitive user interface and re mote control The Philips logical user interface allows you to easily navigate through your content and settings, so you can quickly find what you are looking for. Easy and simple connection to your HDTV via HDMI Connect your BDP7520 to your HDTV with one single HDMI (High Definition Mu ltimedia Interface) cable. Philips recommends HDMI1.4 (category 2) cable (also known as High Speed HDMI cable) for better comp atibility. The hig h definition video output signal will be tr ansferred to your HDTV without conversion to analog signals, so you will get excellent picture and sound quality, completely free from noise. Thanks to other multiple outputs, yo u can also easily connect to your home theater system or amplifier. About EasyLi nk (HDMI CEC) (Consumer Electronics Control) EasyLink (HDMI CEC) allows you to operate the linked functions of this player with Philips brand TV with EasyLink feature. Philips does not guarantee 100 % interoperability with other brands of HDMI CEC compliant devices. PiP (BONUSVIEW) Some BD-videos have the PiP function which enables you to display the secondary video in th e primary video. You can call up the secondary video by pressing [BONUSVIEW (PiP)] whenever the scene contai ns the secondary video. BD-Live BD-Live (BD-ROM version 2 Profile 2.0) th at allows interactive functions to be used when th is unit is connected to the Internet in addition to the BONUSVIEW function. Th e various functions differ depending on the disc. Pop-up menu Some BD-videos have a pop-up menu w hich is a navigation menu th at ca n be ca lled u p and be operated on the TV screen without interrupting playback. You can call up the pop-up menu by pressing [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] . Contents in the pop-up menu vary dependin g on the disc. HDMI Deep Color Deep Color reduces posterizat ion effect of the playback image. Refer to âÂÂHDMI Deep Colo râ in the âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGSâ on page 46. HDMI 1080p/24 o utput (BD only) This unit is equipped with the feature which can provid e smooth movement du ring playback o f film origin ated materi al with the frame rate of 24 frames per second with progressive. (Av ailable only when the dis play device is co nnected by an HDMI cable.) Refer to âÂÂHDMI 1080p/24â in the âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGSâ on page 46 . Playing back contents fro m an SD Memory Card You can play back AVCHD / DivXî / MP3 / WMA / JPEGs store d in an SD Memory Card. BD-ROM Profile 2.0 (BD-Live) and Profile 1.1 discs sometimes s tore picture-in-picture commentary, subtitles or other extras in the SD Memory Card for use during playback with the BD-video. Playing back AVCHD files This unit supp orts pla ybac k of AVCHD form at file s (ne w form at for high defin ition video camcord ers) recorded on disc / SD card. Your high definition per sonal archive is playable in HD quality. x.v.Color This unit supports playback of video contents on discs recorded with âÂÂx.v.Colorâ tech nology. To watch this video content with the âÂÂx.v.Colorâ sp ace, a TV or other display device s upporting both video image repr oduction using âÂÂx.v.Colorâ standard and capabili ty of manual switching of its color space setting is required. Pl ease refer to the user manual of your displa y device for further info rmation. Features Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
10 FEATURES EN Enjoy contents stored on DLNA certified home media servers This unit is a DLNA certifie d media player that can pl ay video, music and photo files stored on DLNA ce rtified home media servers connected to your home network. Netflix With this unit, you can enjoy movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from Netflix vi a the Internet. In order t o use this feature, you must visit netf lix.com/Philips on your PC and become a Netflix member. (This feature is available on ly in the United States. ) CinemaNow / Blockbuster With this unit, you can enjoy movies and TV epi sodes streamed instantly from CinemaNow / Bl ockbuster via the Internet. In order to use this feature, yo u must visit following website on your PC and become a CinemaNow / Blockbus ter member. - C inemaNow : www.cinemanow.com/Login - Blockbuster : www.blockbus ter.com/auth/login VUDU This unit supports VUDU which is th e leading HD on-demand video service. With VUDU, you ca n also enjoy various kinds of Internet applications. In order to use this feature, you must connect this unit to the Internet. âÂÂProduct Infoâ screen provides information about this unitâÂÂs hardware and software version. You can also download the latest software from the Philips web site and upgrade it yourself if it is newer than the version currently on your unit. The current version of software on your unit can be seen on the âÂÂProduct I nfoâ screen. To access âÂÂProduct InfoâÂÂ, follow the procedure below. 1) Press [ (home)]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂOthersâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂProduct InfoâÂÂ, then press [OK]. To specify which media type each function is ap plicable to, we put the following symbols at th e beginning of each item to operate. If you do not find any of the symb ols listed above under the function heading, the operation is appl icable to all media. Product Info Symbols Used in this User Manual Symbol Description Description refers to BD-video Description refers to DVD-video Description refers to audio CD / DTS-CD Description refers to DVD-RW/-R and SD card with AVCHD files Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with DivXî files Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with MP3 files Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with Windows Media⢠Audio f iles Description refers to BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R, CD-RW/-R and SD card with JPEG files Description refers to video files in the DLNA home server Description refers to music files in the DLNA home server Description refers to photo files in the DLNA home server
11 EN EN FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 1. Q (standby/on) button ⢠Press to turn on the unit, or t o turn the unit into the standby mode. (To completely turn off the unit, you must unplug the AC power co rd.) ⢠Press and hold for 10 seconds to shut do wn the unit. ⢠This button lights up in red when the unit is in standby mode and turns off when the power is on. 2. C (stop) button ⢠Press to stop playback. 3. F (pause) button ⢠Press to pause playback. 4. B (play) button ⢠Press to start or resume playback. 5. A (open/close) button ⢠Press to open or close the disc tray. 6. Disc tray ⢠Place a disc after opening the disc tray. 7. Display ⢠Refer to âÂÂFront Panel Displayâ on page 14. 8. Infrared sensor window ⢠Receive signals from your remote control so that you can control the unit from a distance. 9. SD card slot ⢠Insert an SD Memory Card and p lay back the contents in it. 1. HDMI OUT jack ⢠Use to connect to a displa y with an HDMI compatible port with an HDMI cable. 2. LAN terminal ⢠Use to connect to network provisioning equipment such as a router or a modem with a LAN cable. 3. AUDIO OUT jacks ⢠Use to connect a TV monitor, an AV receiver / amplifier or other device with an RCA audio cable. 4. COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks ⢠Use to connect a TV monitor with component video inputs with an RCA component video cable. 5. AC power cord ⢠Connect to a standard AC outlet to supply power to this unit. ⢠Unplug this cord from the AC outlet to complet ely turn off the unit. 6. Wireless LAN (Internal) 7. DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack ⢠Use to connect an AV receiver / amplifier, Dolby Digital / DTS decoder or other device with a di gital audio coaxial input jack with a digital audio coaxial cable. 8. VIDEO OUT jack ⢠Use to connect a TV monitor, an AV receiver / amplifier or other device with an RCA video cable. Front Panel 2 1 4 5 7 6 8 9 3 Note ⢠Due to new ENERGY ST ARî requiremen ts, this unit will automatically enter stand by mode after 25 minutes of inactivity. Rear Panel DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT 2 1 7 6 3 8 4 5 Note ⢠Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel. Electrosta tic discharge may cause permanen t damage to the unit. ⢠This unit does not have the R F modulator . ⢠Do not try to rip the internal W ireless LAN from the unit. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
12 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN * The unit can also be turned on by pressing these buttons. 1. Q (standby/on) button ⢠Press to turn on the unit, or t o turn the unit into the standby mode. (To completely turn off the unit, you must unplug the AC power co rd.) 2. BONUSVIEW (PiP) button ⢠Press to switch picture in picture feat ure on/off (only applicable to BD-vid eo which supports the PiP (BONUSVIEW) function). 3. ZOOM button ⢠Press to enlarge the picture on the TV screen. 4. Red / Green / Blue / Yellow button ⢠Press to activate short cut keys on some BD-video function. ⢠When file list / setup list is shown, press to sw itch between pages. 5. (home) button ⢠Press to display the home menu. 6. DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU button BD: ⢠Press to display the pop-up menu. DVD: ⢠Press to display the disc menu. 7. K / L / s / B buttons ⢠Press to select items or settings. 8. OK button ⢠Press to confirm or select menu items. 9. BACK U button ⢠Press to return to the previously displayed menu or screen function. 10. B (pl ay) button* ⢠Press to start playback or resume playback. 11. S (previous) button ⢠During playback, press once to return to the beginning of the current title, chapter, track or file. ⢠During playback, press twice to return to the previous title, chapter, track o r file. ⢠During the JPEG playbac k, press to return to the previous file. 12. E (reverse) button ⢠During playback, press to fast reverse the playback. 13. C (stop) button ⢠Press to stop playback. 14. TV VOL ⴠ/ ⴠbutton ⢠Press to adjust the TV volu me. (Applicable to Philips TVs with Easy Link or some other devices with H DMI CEC. EasyLink has to be enabled in both devices for this function to work.) 15. A (open/close) button* ⢠Press to open or close the disc tray. 16. Number buttons ⢠Press to select a chapter during playback. ⢠Press to enter values in the input field. 17. SUBTITLE button ⢠Press to select subtitles on a disc. 18. ANGLE button ⢠Press to select camera angles on a disc. ⢠Press to rotate a picture ( JPEG). 19. HDMI button ⢠Press to set the HDMI output mode. 20. AUDIO button ⢠Press to select the audio channel (such as audio languages) on a disc. 21. TV CH ⴠ/ ⴠbutton ⢠Press to change the channel up and down. (Applicable to Philips TVs with EasyLink or some other devices with HDMI CEC. EasyL ink has to be enabled in both devices for this function to work.) 22. d (mute) button ⢠Press to mute the TV volume. (Applicable to Philips TVs with Easy Link or some other devices with H DMI CEC. EasyLink has to be enabled in both devices for this function to work.) 23. D (forward) button ⢠During playback, press to fast forward the playback. ⢠When playback is in pause, press to slow forward the playback. 24. T (next) button ⢠During playback, press to skip to the next chapter, track or file. 25. F (pause) button ⢠Press to pause playback. ⢠When playback is in pause mode, press repeatedly to forward the playback step by step. 26. INFO button ⢠Press to display the information display. 27. TOP MENU button BD: ⢠Press to display the top menu. DVD: ⢠Press to display the title menu. 28. REPEAT A-B button ⢠Press to play back a defined section between point A and B repeatedly. 29. REPEAT button ⢠Press to toggle between various repeat modes. Remote Control 1 2 5 6 7 9 11 10* 12 13 14 16 17 18 4 3 8 15* 29 28 27 26 24 21 20 19 23 22 25
13 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN EN Install 2 AAA (1.5V) batteries matching the polarity indicated inside battery compart ment of the remote control. Remote Control Usage Guidelines: ⢠Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote control and the infrared sensor window on the unit. ⢠Remote operation may become unre liable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the infrared sensor window of the unit. ⢠Remote control for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remote control for other device located close to the unit. ⢠Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote control. ⢠The maximum operable ranges from the unit are as follows. - Line of sight: approx. 23 feet (7 m) - Either side of the center: approx. 16 feet (5 m) within 30ð -A b o v e : approx. 16 feet (5 m) within 15ð -B e l o w : approx. 10 feet (3 m) within 30ð Installing the Batteries in the Remote Control 1) Open the cover. 2) Insert batteries. Make sure to match and - on the batteries t o the marks indicated in the batt ery compartment. 3) Close the cover. Note Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Plea se observe the following: ⢠Do not mix new and old batt eries together . ⢠Do not use diff erent kinds of batteries to gether . Although they may look similar , different batteries may hav e different v oltages. ⢠Make sure that the and - ends of each battery match the indications in the batter y compar tment. ⢠Remove ba tteries from batt er y compar tment that is not going to be used for a m onth or more. ⢠When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instructionâ s rules th at apply in your country or area. ⢠Do not recharge , shor t- circuit, heat, burn or disassemble batteries. Using a Remote Control 30à30à16 feet (5 m) 23 feet (7 m) 16 feet (5 m) Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
14 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN 1. Displays repeat icon. (Appears during repeat playback.) 2. Displays media mode icon (d isc mode or SD card mode). 3. Displays playback status ic on. Refer to the table below. 4. Displays information such as title number, el apsed playing time, repeat type, menu type, etc. e.g.) Front Panel Display 1 2 3 4 * Brightness of the display can be adju sted. Refer to âÂÂFront Pane l Brightnessâ in âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGS â on page 50. Playback status icon Mode Playback is in progress Stop mode Pause mode Fast forward mode Fast reverse mode Slow forward mode Loading Disc is being played back. Indicating the current title number and the elapsed time. Current chapter is in chapter repeat mode during playback of disc. Loading a disc. Dolby Digital audio is being played back during playback of disc. DTS audio is being played back during playback of disc. Home menu is displayed and the unit is in disc mode. Loading VUDU.
15 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW EN EN When you turn on the unit, home menu wil l appear automatically. Otherwise, press [( h o m e ) ] . 1. Directory Displays the current hierarchy. 2. Menus 3. Options Displays options for the highli ghted item on the left whenever available. Guide to On-Screen Display Home Menu âÂÂPlay Discâ : I nitiates playback of inserted disc, displays a list of tracks / files or the media filter menu âÂÂSD Cardâ : D isplays a list of tracks / files on the inserted SD card or the media filter menu âÂÂHome Networkâ : Displays a list of avai lable DLNA media servers discover ed on the connected network âÂÂSettingsâ : T o access settings menus âÂÂMediaConnect â : To access the Philips Wireless MediaConnect menu âÂÂNETFLIXâ : L aunches the Netflix applica tion âÂÂvuduâ : Launches the VUDU App Home screen âÂÂBLOCKBUSTERâ : Launches the Blo ckbuster application âÂÂCinemaNowâ : Launches the CinemaNow application Menu Screen Blu-ray Disc Pla yer Play Disc SD Card Home Networ k Settings BD-Player Settings 3 D Output Language Video Output Audio Ratings Lock Network Connection Others Factory Default Auto (xx) 3D 2D 2 3 1 Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
EN 16 CONNECTIONS (Supports up to 1080i (*1) , 1080p (*2) , 1080p/24 reso lution.) (*1) 1080i : Outputs the video data with frame rate of 30 frames per second. (*2) 1080p : Outputs the video data with fr ame rate of 6 0 frames per second. (Supports up to 1080i resolution.) (Supports only 480i resolution. ) ⢠Connect this unit dire c tly to the T V . If the RCA audio / vi deo cables are connected to a VCR, pictures may be distorted due to the copy right protection system. Connection to the TV 1 Choose the ap propriat e connection , then proceed to the corresponding instruction (A, B or C) on the next page. Best HDMI IN A Video Audio HDMI cable Your TV No analog audio connection required. Go To No supplied cables are used in this connection: ⢠Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store. Use an HDMI cable with the HDMI logo (a cer tified HDMI cable) for this connection. High Speed HDMI cable (also k nown as HDMI categor y 2 cable) is recommended for better compatibility . ⢠T o enjoy 3D Blu-ra y video, connect this unit to a 3D capable T V using an HDMI 1.4 cable . Better B COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y P B/C B P R/C R AUDIO IN R L Video Audio RCA component video cable Your TV Go To RCA audio cable Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows: ⢠RCA audio cabl e (L/R) x 1 Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store. Basic C AUDIO IN R L VIDEO IN Video Audio RCA video cable Your TV Go To RCA audio cable Supplied cables used in this connection are as follows: ⢠RCA audio cabl e (L/R) x1 ⢠RCA video cable x1
17 CONNECTIONS EN EN HDMI Video / Audio Connection Component Video Standard Audio Connection Standard Video Stan dard Audio Connection 2 Connect the cables by followi ng the descriptions b elow. DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN A HDMI IN ($-)îÂÂ/54 HDMI OUT HDMI cable Your TV L Y P R /C R P B /C B R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT B COMPONENT VIDEO IN Y PR/CR PB/CB AUDIO IN R L DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P B / C B R VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L Y P R / C R RCA component video cable Your TV RCA audio cable DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT L C AUDIO IN R L L R AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN Your TV RCA video cable RCA audio cable Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Se tup
18 CONNECTIONS EN Press [HDMI] to change the resolution of the video signal being output from the HDMI OUT jack. The video resolution changes as follows every time [HDMI] is pressed. Or change the setting in th e âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ in the settings menu. HDMI Mode and Actual Output Signals Font Panel Display HD MI Video Resolution 480 Progressive Press [HDMI] 720 Progressive Press [HDMI] 1080 Interlaced Press [HDMI] 1080 Progress ive Press [HDMI] Copyright protection system To play back the digita l video images of a BD-video or DVD-vi deo via an HDMI connection, it is necessary that both the player and the display device (or an AV receiver / amplifie r) support a copyright protection system called HDCP (high- bandwidth digital content protection system). HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP. Please read the operating instructions of your display device (or AV receiver / amplifier) for more information. Note ⢠When connected to an HDCP incompatible display device, the picture will not be displayed properly . ⢠The audio signals fr om the HDMI jack (including the samp ling frequency , the number of channels and bit length) may be limited by the device that is connec ted. ⢠Among the displa y device(s) that support HDMI, some do no t suppor t audio output (for example, projectors). While connected to a device such as a projector , audi o will not be output from the HDMI OUT jack . ⢠When this unitâ s HDMI jack is connected to a DVI-D comp a tible display device(s) (HD CP compatible) with an HDMI- DVI conv er ter cable, the signals are output in digital RGB. â¢P r e s s i n g [HDMI] does not work when HDMI cable is not connected, or when no video signal is being output fr om the HDMI OUT jack. â¢P r e s s i n g [HDMI] does not work during the playback of a BD-video. ⢠When you make a selection, the T V monitor temporarily goes blank and then comes back again. I f it does not, press [HDMI] repeatedly to change the resolution or press and hold [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its default.
19 CONNECTIONS EN EN ⢠When you change the connections, all devices should be turned off . ⢠Refer to the manual accompan ying ex ternal devices for more inf ormation. Audio Output from Analog Out (2ch Jacks) *1) Full decoded. *2) Only the independent substream is decoded. *3) Dolby TrueHD stream is decoded. *4) Only the Dolby Digital subst ream is decoded. *5) Only the core substream is decoded. Connection to an Audio System 2-Channel Analog Audio Connecti on Digital Audio Connection DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT L R AUDIO OUT P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM A UDIO IN L R L R A UDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT PCM / BITSTREAM COAXIAL COAXIAL DIGIT AL AUDIO INPUT audio AUDIO OUT analog audio input jacks RCA audio cable stereo system this unit digital audio coaxial input jack digital audio RCA cable DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) AV receiver / amplifier To set up âÂÂDigital OutâÂÂ, refer to page 55. âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setting A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Media ê Audio Source ê BD-video Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM Dolby Digital Plus DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch P CM *2 Dolby TrueHD DownMix 2ch PCM *3 DownMix 2ch P CM *4 DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DTS-HDî DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch P CM *5 LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DVD-video Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM 2ch PCM DTS-CD DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM AVCHD Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DivXî Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP3 / MP2 2ch PCM Audio CD PCM 2ch PCM MP3 MP3 2ch PCM Windows Media⢠Audio WMA 2ch PCM DLNA Video Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP2 2ch PCM LPCM 2ch PCM DLNA Music MP3 / WMA / LPCM 2ch PCM Netflix WMA 2ch PCM Cinema Now AAC 2ch PCM Blockbuster AAC 2ch PCM VUDU Dolby Digital Plus DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch P CM *2 MP3 2ch PCM Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Se tup
20 CONNECTIONS EN To set up âÂÂHDMI AudioâÂÂ, refer to page 53. By connecting this unit to the Internet , you can upgrade the software via the In ternet, play contents stored on DLNA home media servers or access BD-Live, Netfli x, CinemaNow, Blockbuster and VUDU services. - For more information about software upgrad e, refer to âÂÂNetwork Upgradeâ on page 62. - For more information about DLNA, refer to âÂÂPlaying Vide o / Music / Photo Files from DLNA Certified Home Media Serversâ on page 31. - For more information about BD-Live, refer to âÂÂE njoying BD-Live Discs with Internetâ on page 36. - For more information about Netflix, re fer to âÂÂNETFLIX OPERATIONSâ on page 40. - For more informa tion about CinemaNow and Blockbuster, refer to âÂÂCIN EMANOW / BLOCKBUSTER OPERATIONSâ on page 41. - For more information about VUDU, re fer to âÂÂVUDU OPERATIONSâ on page 43. Make the following connection if you are using a wired router. HDMI Audio Connection DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN LAN HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI IN audio this unit HDMI cable AV receiver / amplifier with an HDMI input jack Supplied cables used in these connections are as f ollows: ⢠RCA audio cabl e (L/R) x 1 Please purchase the rest of the necessary cables at your local store. Connection to the Network Note ⢠Wired connection is rec ommended when using following features . (Using following features wi th wireless connection can be affected by other devices us ing radio frequencies.) - Play contents from DLNA certified home media servers - Video streaming services (Netflix / CinemaNow / Blockbus ter / VUDU) -N e t w o r k u p g r a d e Wired Connection LAN WAN LAN 1 2 3 4 5 LAN DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDI O OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL Wireless LAN HDMI OUT LAN this unit Internet LAN cable LAN cable Hub or wired router ADSL / cable modem No supplied cables are used in this connection: Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store.
21 CONNECTIONS EN EN Make the following connection if you are using a wireless router. Note ⢠After you made a wired connection, set up necessar y network settings. (For the network setting of wired connection, refer to âÂÂWired Connectionâ on page 57.) ⢠Do not inser t any cable other than a LAN cable t o the LAN terminal to av oid damaging the unit. ⢠If your modem does no t have router functions, connect a wired router . ⢠If your modem has router functions but there is no vacant port, use a hub. ⢠For a wir ed router , use a rout er which sup por ts 10BASE- T / 100BASE- T X. ⢠Do not connect your PC dir ec tly to the LAN terminal of t his unit. ⢠Please purchase shielded LAN cables at your local store and use them when you connect to network equipment. Wireless Connection DIGITAL OUT PCM/BITSTREAM P R / C R P B / C B Y L R COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT COAXIAL LAN HDMI OUT Wireless LAN LAN WAN Wireless LAN this unit Internet LAN cable Wireless router ADSL / cable modem No supplied cables are used in this connection: Please purchase the necessary cables at your local store. Note ⢠After you made the wireless connection, set up necessary network settings. (For the network setting of wireless connection, refer to âÂÂWireless Connection â on page 60.) ⢠For a wireless r outer , use a router which supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. (n is recommended for stable operation of the wireless network.) ⢠Set the wireless router to Inf rastructu re mode. This unit does not suppor t Ad-hoc mode. ⢠Other radio devices or obstacles may cause inter ference to the wir eless network connect ion. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Function Se tup
EN 22 BEFORE YOU START After you have completed all the connectio ns, you must find the viewing channel (external input channel) on your TV. Finding the Viewing Channel on Your TV 1 After you have made all the necessary connections, press [ Q (standby/on)] to turn on the unit. 2 Turn on your TV. 3 Press the button on the TVâÂÂs remote control that accesses the external input channel. It may be labeled âÂÂSOURCEâÂÂ, âÂÂAVâ or âÂÂSELECTâ (refer to your TVâÂÂs user manual). Or press âÂÂ2â on the TVâÂÂs remote control, then press channel down button repeatedly until you see the PHILIPS splash screen. This is the correct viewing channel (external input channel). ⢠If a cer tain amount of time has passed since you turned on the unit, y ou may see the home menu instead of the PHILIPS splash screen. Home menu: Blu-ray Disc Pla yer Play Disc SD Card Home Networ k Settings
23 EN EN INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK Before you start playing back a disc, read the following informa tion. This unit is compatible to p lay back the following discs / files. To play back a disc / file, make sure that it meets the requirements for region codes and color systems as described below. You can play back disc s that have the following logos. Other disc types are not guara nteed to play back. (*) Due to the intent ional progression of the Blu-ray Disc format by its standard setting authority, the company cannot guarantee or warrant the playability of future extensions of the Blu-ray Disc format with this product. ⢠ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivXî is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. T his is an official DivX Cer tified device that plays DivX video . Visit www .divx.com for more information and soft ware tools to convert your files into DivX video. ⢠ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This D ivX Certifiedî device must be registered in or der to play DivX Video- on- Demand ( VOD) content. T o generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vo d.divx.com with this code t o complete the registration proc ess an d learn more about DivX VOD . ⢠DivX Certifiedî to play DivXî video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. ⢠Discs containing the DivXî files with the DivXî GMC (Global Motion Compensation) playback feature, which is DivXî supplemental function, cannot be played back on this unit. ⢠This unit cannot play back the disc contents protec ted by Windo ws Media⢠Digital Rights Managemen t (DRM). Information on Playback Playable Discs and Files Playable discs Logos Blu-ray Disc - BD-video - Blu-ray 3D Disc - Blu-ray 3D only Disc - BD-RE* (ver. 2.1) (Recorded in BDMV format) - BD-R* (ver. 1.1 / 1.2 / 1.3) (Recorded in BDMV format) (Unclosed discs may not be played back.) DVD-video DVD-RW (finalized video mode discs only) DVD-R (finalized video mode discs only) CD-DA (audio CD) CD-RW CD-R KODAK Picture CD DTS-CD - Playable files Media AVCHD DVD-RW/-R SD Memory Card (including SDHC) miniSD Card microSD Card DivXî BD-RE/-R DVD-RW/-R CD-RW/-R SD Memory Card (including SDHC) miniSD Card microSD Card MP3 Windows Media⢠Audio JPEG Readable cards Playable files / data SD Memory Card (8 MB - 2 GB) AVCHD, DivXî, MP3 , WMA, JPEG, picture-in-picture commentary, subtitles or other extras for BD-ROM ver. 2 (Profile 2.0 / Profile 1.1) SDHC Memory Card (4 GB - 8 GB) miniSD Card (8 MB - 2 GB) microSD Card (8 MB - 2 GB) Note for SD Memory Car ds ⢠This unit supports SD Memor y Card wit h F A T12 / F A T16 file syst em, and SDHC Memor y Card with F A T32 file syst em. ⢠This unit does not support NTFS file sy stem. ⢠This unit may not read SD Me mor y Cards formatted on a computer . If that is the cas e, please reformat the SD Memor y Cards in this unit and try again . ⢠This unit does not support miniSDHC and microSDHC Memory Card . ⢠For miniSD Card and microSD C ard, an adapter is necessar y . ⢠Portions of this produc t are protected under copyright law and are pro vided under license by ARIS / SOLANA / 4C. ⢠Please keep the SD Memor y Cards in their cases when you are not using them. ⢠Do not tr y to open or modify the card. ⢠Do not touch the terminal sur f ace with your fingers or any metals. ⢠Do not attach additional labels or stickers to cards. ⢠Do not r emove the l abel of the SD Me mor y Car ds. ⢠This unit recog nizes up to 8 characters of file name in the SD Memory Card. Characters af ter 8th will not be display ed. miniSD Card adapter miniSD Card microSD Card microSD Card adapter Introducti on Connections Ba sic Setup Playback Others Function Setup
24 INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK EN The following discs will not be played back in this unit. ⢠BD-RE (ver .1.0) ⢠BD-RE (ver .2.1) (Recorded in BD A V format) ⢠BD-R (ver .1.1 / 1.2 / 1.3) (Recorded in BD A V format) ⢠BD that contains A VCHD files ⢠BD / DVD hybrid disc (pla yed back as a BD-video only) ⢠Super Audio CD - Only the sound on the CD lay er can be heard. The sound on the high-density Super Audio CD layer cannot be hear d. ⢠Playability of dual discs are not guaranteed. BD-video and DVD-video are recorded in different color systems throughout the world. The most common color system is NTSC (which is us ed primarily in the United States and Canada). This unit employs NTSC color system, so the disc you play back must be recorded in the NTSC system. You cannot play back the disc record ed in other color systems. The contents of disc are generally divided into sections or folders (groups of titles / files) as shown below . [ ] : group (folder) icon [ ] : group (folder) return icon [ ] : video file icon [ ] : music file icon [ ] : photo file icon [ ] : information icon [ ] : key icon [ ] : signal icon - âÂÂFoldersâ refers to the groups of files. - âÂÂTracksâ refers to the cont ents recorded on the audio CD. - âÂÂFilesâ refers to the contents on a disc which are recorded in DivXî, MP3, Wind ows Media⢠Audi o, JPEG file format. Unplayable Discs and Files ⢠CD-ROM ⢠CD-I (compact disc-interactive) â¢D V D - R A M â¢V S D ( v i d e o s i n g l e d i s c ) â¢D V D - a u d i o â¢v i d e o C D ⢠HD DVD ⢠SVCD ⢠unfinalized disc Color Systems Region Codes This unit has been designed to play back BD-video with region âÂÂAâÂÂ, DVD-video with region âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ1â for BDP7520/F7 (USA / Canada) and region âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ4â for BDP7520/F8 (Mexico). You cannot play back BD-video or DVD-video that are labeled for other regions. Look for the symbols on the right on your BD-video or DVD-video. If these region symbols do not appear on your BD-video or DVD-video, you cannot play back the disc in this unit. The lett er or number inside the globe refers to region of the world. A BD-video or DVD-video labeled for a specific region can only be played back in the unit with the same region code. BD-video DVD-video For BDP7520/F7 (USA / Canada) For BDP7520/F8 (Mexico) Hint for Disc Playback Description for Icons Note ⢠Unrecognizable characters will be replaced by â î âÂÂ. ⢠For BD , DVD and SD card, this unit can recognize up to 999 groups (f olders), and 9,999 tracks / files. ⢠For CD , this unit can recognize up t o 255 groups (folders), and 999 tracks / files . BD-video, DVD-video, AVCHD title 1 title 2 chapter 1 chapter 2 chapter 2 chapter 1 chapter 3 Audio CD track 1 track 2 track 3 track 4 track 5 DivXî, MP3,Windows Med ia⢠Audi o, JP EG folder (group) 1 folder (group) 2 file 1 file 2 file 1 file 2 file 3
25 INFORMATION ON PLAYBACK EN EN 1) Total track number 2) Repeat status 3) Image 4) Elapsed playing time of the current track 5) Playing track number 6) Total time of the current track 7) Playing media 8) Track list 9) Playback status e.g.) MP3 mode 1) Number of contents in the current hierarchy 2) Repeat status (Music mode only) 3) Image 4) Elapsed playing time of the current track 5) Current file name 6) Media type 7) Group (folder) / File list 8) Playback status 9) Root folder 10) Directory 1) Directory 2) Number of contents in the current hierarchy 3) Current file name 4) Group (folder) / File list (thumbnails) 5) Root folder 1) Press [ A (open/close)] to op en the disc tray. 2) Place the disc on the disc tray with its label side facing up. * Make sure the disc is compatible w ith this unit (re fer to page 23 for the li st of compatible discs). 3) Press [ A (open/close)] to cl ose the disc tray. To eject the disc: Press [ A (open/close)] to open the disc tray. Remove the disc. Press [ A (open/close)] to close the disc tray. Guide to File List Audio CD Track List Video / Music Mode File List CDDA 00 : 03 : 40 00 : 00 : 39 14 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 001 BD-Player Music T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack T rack Page Down T rack 7 6 5 4 3 1 9 8 2 MP3_1.mp3 MP3 MP3_3.mp3 00:00:13 MP3_2.mp3 MP3_3.mp3 MP3_4.mp3 MP3_5.mp3 MP3_6.mp3 MP3_7.mp3 9 .. BD-Player Play Disc Music Media Filter Page Down | 1 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Picture Mode File List How to Insert a Disc It may take a while to load the disc. .. 24 BD-Player Play Disc Pictures Media Filter Page Down | 12 4 5 3 Align the disc to the disc tray guide. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
EN 26 BASIC PLAYBACK Playing Back a BD, DVD or a Disc with AVCHD Files 1 In s e r t a d i s c ( r e f e r t o â H o w t o I n s e r t a Discâ on page 25). 2 Playback may start automatically. If not, press [ B (play)] . Some discs may show a title or a disc menu. In this case, refer to âÂÂUsing the Title / Disc Menuâ on page 33. To pause playback: Press [ F (pause)] . To return to the normal playback: Press [ B (pl ay)] . To stop playback: Press [ C (stop)] . Playback will be in Resume-On-Stop mode, and the home menu will appear. <Resume-On-Stop mode> When you press [ B (play)] next time, the playback will start from the point where it has been stopped. Note ⢠Playbac k will also stop and the home menu will appear when you press [( h o m e ) ] . ⢠For BD- Java application, the Resume- On-Stop may not be available. ⢠If you press [OK] instead of [ B (pl ay)] , playback can be star ted from the beginning of the disc even if it was in the Resume -On-Stop mode. ⢠Y ou can also start from the beginning of the disc if you press [ S (previous)] while the resume message is displayed. ⢠The resume message can be r emoved by pressing [BACK U ] . ⢠Resume -On-Stop mode remains in effect even after power is turned off , but will be can celled once the disc is ejected. ⢠If you change âÂÂ3D Outputâ setting to âÂÂ2Dâ while the unit is in the Resume- On-Stop mode of Blu-ray 3D Disc playback, the resume information will be clear ed.
27 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN â¢U s e [ K / L] to move the highlight up an d down in the list. ⢠T o access the files in a group (folder), select the d esired group (folder), then pr ess [OK] . â¢P r e s s [ s] , or select [ ], then press [OK] to go back to the previous hierarch y. â¢P r e s s [ s] to go back to the previous screen. â¢P r e s s [Blue] or [Yellow] to change the page of the list. â¢P r e s s [Red] to go back to the media filter screen. â¢P r e s s [( h o m e ) ] to go back to th e home menu. Recommended specifications: DivXî Official DivXî Certified product MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio JPEG Resolution Folder / File number limitations: BD, DVD and SD card ⢠999 folders (gr oups) and 9,999 files. CD ⢠255 folders (gr oups) and 999 tracks / files. Playing Back an Audio CD or a Disc with Di vXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Files How to Navigate through the Track / File List ⢠Playable codec of A VI files : DivXî 3.x, DivX î 4.x, DivXî 5.x, DivXî 6.x ⢠Maximum size of a video : 1920 x 1080 @60 fps ⢠Sampling frequency of audio : 16 kHz - 48 kHz ⢠Audio type : MPEG1 audio layer 3(MP3), MPEG1 audio lay er 2, Dolby Digital ⢠Sampling frequency : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz ⢠Constant bit rate : 112 kbps - 320 kbps (MP3), 48 kbps - 192 kbps (Windows Media⢠Audio) ⢠Upper limit : : 2,560 x 1,900 dots (sub sampling is 4:4:4) 5,120 x 3,840 dots (sub sampling is up to 4:2:2) ⢠Low er limit : 32 x 32 dots ⢠Maximum file size of a picture :5 M B Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
28 BASIC PLAYBACK EN 1 Insert a disc (ref er to âÂÂHow to Insert a Discâ on page 25) . ⢠Home menu appears automatically. 2 With âÂÂPlay Discâ selected, press [OK]. ⢠Media filter screen will appear . ⢠F or audio CD, skip to step 4. 3 Select the type of the file you want to play back in the media filter screen. Then press [OK] to display the file list. Blu-ray Disc Pla yer Play Disc SD Card Home Networ k Settings âÂÂVideoâ : If you want to play back video files such as DivXî video, select âÂÂVideoâÂÂ. âÂÂMusicâ : If you want to play back music files such as MP3 or Windows Media⢠Audio, select âÂÂMu sicâÂÂ. âÂÂPicturesâ : If you want to play back the still images such as JPEG pictures, select âÂÂPicturesâÂÂ. BD-Play er Play Disc Video Music Pictures 4 Select a group (folder) or trac k / file you want to play back. Then press [ B (play)] or [OK] to start playback. Refer to âÂÂHow to Naviga te through the Track / File Listâ on page 27. To skip to the next track / file: Press [ T (next)] . To skip to the previous track / file: Press [ S (previous)] . To pause playback: Press [ F (pause)] . To return to the normal playback: Press [ B (pl ay)] . To stop playback: Press [ C (stop)] . Playback will be in Resume-On-Stop mode. <Resume-On-Stop mode for audio CD / DivXî > Playback will start from the point where it is stopped next time you press [ B (play )] . If you press [OK] instead of [ B (play) ] , playback will start from the beginning of the track / file instead of resuming from the stop point. <Resume-On-Stop mode for MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG > Playback will start from the beginning of the current file next time you pres s [ B (play)] or [OK] . To go back to the media filter screen: Press [Red] in Resume-On-Stop mode. Note ⢠Playbac k will also stop and the home menu will appear when you press [( h o m e ) ] . ⢠If a disc contains A VCHD files, the playback of other files on the same disc is not available. All files on an SD Memor y Card are available. ⢠With regar d to the multi-border BD-RE/-R, additionally r ecorded sections cannot be recognized. ⢠With regar d to the multi-border DVD-RW/-R, ad di tio na ll y re co rde d se c ti on s m ay n ot be recognized.
29 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN This unit can play back Blu-ray 3D Disc which contains stereoscopic 3D video. In orde r to view 3D Blu-ray videos, you need to have the following: - 3D capable TV - HDMI 1.4 cable - 3D glasses - Blu-ray 3D Disc or Blu -ray 3D only Disc This unit can also run JPEG files store d on KODAK Picture CD. You can enjoy picture ima ges on the TV set by playing back the KODAK Pi cture CD. This unit conforms t o ver.7.0 of KODAK Picture CD. For details of KOD AK Picture CD, contact a shop that p rovides developing service of Kodak Inc. Playing Back a Blu-ray 3D Disc 1 Connect 3D capable TV with HDMI 1.4 cable. ⢠Refer to âÂÂC onnec tion to the T V â on page 16. 2 Insert a Blu-ray 3D D isc or a Blu-ray 3D only Disc. ⢠Refer to âÂÂHow t o I nsert a Disc â on page 25. 3 Follow step 2 in âÂÂPlaying Back a BD, DVD or a Disc with AVCHD Filesâ on page 26. Caution ⢠W atching 3D videos may cause headache, dizziness or tiredness. T o avoid such consequences, do not wa tch 3D videos for a long period of time . ⢠W atching 3D videos is not recommended f or the following people: - People wh o are susceptible to motion sickness - Children fro m walking age to seven years -P r e g n a n t w o m a n For more information, refer to âÂÂIMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D TELEVISIONSâ on page 71. Note ⢠F or more information, refer t o the 3D T V â s manual. ⢠When âÂÂ3D Outputâ is set to âÂÂA u t o ( X X ) â and your TV is not 3D capable, playback of Blu-ray 3D Discs will revert to 2D depending on the disc. ⢠Y ou can turn of f 3D output mode by setting â 3D Output â to âÂÂ2DâÂÂ. (Ref er to page 4 5.) ⢠For Blu -ray 3D on ly D is cs, p layb ack in 2 D mod e i s not possible. ⢠Y ou can check the current output mode (2D or 3D) by pressing [INFO ] during playback. KODAK Picture CD 1 Insert a KODAK Picture CD. ⢠Home menu appears automatically. 2 With âÂÂPlay Discâ selected, press [OK]. ⢠Media filter screen will appear . 3 Select âÂÂPicturesâ in the media filter screen. Then press [OK] to display the file list. 4 Follow step 4 in âÂÂPlaying Back a n Audio CD or a Di sc with DivX î / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. Tips for JPEG / KODAK Picture CD Playback ⢠Every press on [ANGLE] will turn the image clockwise by 90 degrees when an image is displayed. Note ⢠Some unplayable folders or files may be listed due to the rec ordi ng st atus. ⢠High-resolution JPEG files take longer to be displayed. ⢠Progr essive JPEG files ( JPEG files saved in progressive format) cannot be played back in this unit. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
30 BASIC PLAYBACK EN You can play back the AVCHD / DivXî / MP3 / WMA / JPEG files in an SD Memory Card. With the SD Memory Card, you can also enjoy the follow ing functions. - Special additional contents for BD-ROM Profile 1 ver.1.1. (For more information about the special additional contents, refer to the instruction book that came with the disc.) - BD-Live function (BD-ROM ver. 2 Profile 2.0). (For more information about BD-Li ve, refer to page 36.) Reading the SD Memory Card 1 Insert an SD card and then press [( h o m e ) ] . Home menu appears. 2 With âÂÂSD Cardâ selected, press [OK]. ⢠Media filter screen will appear . 3 Select the type of the file you want to play back in the media filter screen. Then press [OK] to display the file list. For âÂÂVideoâÂÂ: - If the SD Memory Card contains AVCHD and DivXî files, use [ K / L] to select âÂÂAVCHDâ or âÂÂDivXâÂÂ, then press [OK] . - If the SD Memory Card contains AVCHD files and no DivXî fil es , the playback will start right after you select âÂÂVid eoâÂÂ. (The file list is not available fo r AVCHD files.) 4 Follow step 4 in âÂÂPlaying Back a n Audio CD or a Di sc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. To remove the SD Memory Card: In stop mode, gently push in the SD Memory Card, then pull it out slowly. SD Memory Card Note ⢠In the âÂÂSD Cardâ mode, the resume information will be cleared when; - [ C (stop)] is pressed while in the Resume- On-Stop mode. -the SD Memory Card is r emoved. -the unit is turned into the standby mode . ⢠Do not remove the SD Memor y Card or tur n the unit to the standby mode while the contents of the card are in playback. It may result in malfunction or loss of the cardâ s data. ⢠Do not delete the folders or files in the SD Memor y Card with your c omputer . This unit may not read SD Memor y Cards formatted on a comp uter . ⢠If a folder or file name includes one of the f ollowing unrecognizable characters, the folder or file name may not be displayed c orrectly. -Unrecognizable characters : ⢠Playback of DivXî files in an SD Memor y Card is not guaranteed. . , " = [ ] ; / \ : | ÃÂ¥
31 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN On this unit, you can play video, music and pho to files stored on DLNA certified home media servers connected to your home n etwork. I n order to u se this fe ature, you must connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠T o control the playback, use following buttons. Playing Video / Mu sic / Photo Files from DLNA Certified Home Media Servers 1 Connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠Refer to âÂÂC onnec tion to the Network â on page 20. 2 Set up the necessary network connection settings. ⢠Refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 5 7. 3 Start DLNA home media servers in your home networ k. ⢠F or deta ils, refer to the user manual of the DLNA certified device. 4 Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 5 With "Home Ne twork" select ed, press [OK]. ⢠This unit will star t loading the home ser ver list. ⢠T o cancel loading, press [ C (stop)] . ⢠T o reload the home ser ver list, press [Green] . 6 After loading, home server list will appear. Select a home server you want to access, then press [OK]. 7 File list of the selected home server will appear. Select a file you want to play back, then press [ B (play)] or [OK] to start playback. ⢠If you select a folder , select a file in the folder and then press [ B (play )] or [OK] to start playback. 1) Directory 2) Nu mber of contents in the c urrent hierarchy 3) Icon of the current home server 4) Color key (Red / Green / Blue / Yellow button) guide 5) Group (folder) / file list 6) Folder / media icon 7) Root folder (go back to the previous hierarchy) Button Action S (previous) / T (next) Skip to the previous / next file during playback or in pause mode F (pause) Pause the playback B (play) Return to the normal playback C (stop) Stop the playback (For video files, playback will be in Resume-On-Stop mode.) <Resume-On-Stop mode for video files> Playback will start from the point where it is stopped next time you press [ B (play)] . If you press [OK] instead of [ B (play)] , playback will start from the beginning of the file instead of resum ing from the st op point. 10 002 003 004 File 1 ... Music Photo Video audio 1 audio 2 Pic 1 movie Page Down BD-Player Server 1 Home Network || 3 4 2 1 7 5 6 Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
32 BASIC PLAYBACK EN Useful tips for purchased or rented official DivXî Certified Videos ⢠When you purchase or r ent a DivXî file through the official site of DivXî video which is called DivXî V ideo On-Demand ( VOD) ser vices, a registra tion code is required ev er y time you get the new file from the DivXî VOD services. Refer to âÂÂDivXî VODâ in âÂÂLIST OF SETTINGS â on page 50. âÂÂThis re ntal has c views left. Do you want to use one of your c views now?â Some DivXî VOD files are restri cted with limited playable times. You cannot play th em back beyond the limi t. âÂÂThis player is not authorized to play this video.â You cannot play back DivXî VOD files obtained with different registration codes on this unit. âÂÂThis rental is expired.â You cannot play back DivXî VOD files with an expired rental period. âÂÂThis player does not support this video format.â You cannot play back DivXî files whose resolution exc eeds 1920 x 1080. âÂÂThis player does not support this audio format.â For DivXî files with audio format other than MPEG1 audio layer 3 (MP3), MPEG1 audio layer 2 and Dolby Digital, audio will not be output and only the v ideo will be ou tput. Note ⢠F or the home server list, maximum of 10 ser vers can be displayed. ⢠The system can recognize up to 9,999 files (including fol de r s ). ⢠The 10th and deeper hierarchies cannot be displayed. ⢠This unit supports following formats. (F or mats other than listed be low cannot be reco gnized.) - Video : MP EG 1 MPEG 2 PS MPEG 2 TS / TTS -M u s i c : L P C M MP3 WMA - Photo : JPEG ⢠Unplayable files in the home ser ver will not be displayed in the file list. ⢠F or some files, playback is not available even if displayed in the file list. ⢠In order to play back the contents in ho me servers, the player and the servers must be connected to the same a ccess point . ⢠Compatibility and available playback functio n may differ depending on the home server . ⢠If you select a photo file in step 7 on page 31, the selected file will be played back and go to the next file in the current hierar chy in turn every 10 seconds. ⢠F or photo files, every press on [ANGLE] wil l turn the image clockwise by 90 degrees when an image is displayed. ⢠F or a folder contains only photo files, file list or thumbnail list will be displayed, depending on the information from the home ser ver . ⢠Video files with unsupported audio format will be skipped. ⢠The quality of the playback picture or audio differs depending on your network condition. About DivXî and DivXî VOD Possible Errors Note ⢠A file with an extension of â .a viâ and â .DivXâ is called as a DivXî file. All files with the â .a vi â extension are recognized as MPEG4. ⢠F or CD -RW/-R, maximum of 255 group (folder) or 999 files may be recognized . ⢠F or BD -RE/-R and DVD-R W/-R, maximum of 999 group (folder) or 9,999 files may be recogniz ed. ⢠The 10th and deeper hierarchies cannot be displayed. ⢠Unrecognizable characters will be replaced with â î âÂÂ. ⢠When play ing bac k files recorde d in hi gh bit rates, images can be interr upted in some occasions. ⢠Although DivXî logo has been obtained for this unit, it may not be able to play back some data, depending on the characteri stics, bit rates, or audio format settings, et c. ⢠If a large-sized DivXî file is selected, it may take a while to start the playback (over 20 sec onds sometimes). ⢠If DivXî files written on a CD-R W/-R cannot be played back, rewrite them on a BD-RE/-R or DVD-RW/-R, and try playing them back again. ⢠F or more information about DivX î, please visit http://www.divx.com .
33 BASIC PLAYBACK EN EN Subtitles created by the user can be displayed during DivXî playback. 1) Follow steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂPlaying Back an Audio CD or a Disc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. 2) Select a file you want to play back, then press [Green]. Subtitle list will appear. ⢠âÂÂDivX Subtitle â appears next to âÂÂGreen â icon only when DivXî subtitle is available for the selected file. â¢I f y o u p r e s s [ B (pl ay)] or [OK] instead of [Green] , playback without subtitle will star t. 3) Select the desired subtitle file, then press [ B (play)] or [OK]. Playback of the DivXî file with DivXî subtitle will start. Some BD-video, DVD-video or AVCHD files may contain a title menu which describes the contents of the disc, or a disc menu which guides you through the available functions in the disc. With such discs, a title menu or a disc menu may appear automatically when you insert the disc. Otherwise, press [TOP ME NU] or [DISC MENU / POP -UP MENU] to call up the menu. Refer to the discâÂÂs manual on how to navigate through the menu. Playing Back DivXî with DivXî External Subtitle Note ⢠T o utilize this function, the following conditions must be met: -Playback file and subtitle file must have the same name. -Playback file and subtitle file must be loc ated in the same folder . -Only subtitle files with the following extensions are suppor ted; .smi (.SMI), .sr t (.SRT ), .sub (.SUB), .ass (.ASS), .ssa (.SSA), .txt (. T X T ). (.sub (.SUB) and .txt (.TXT ) may not be recognized .) -Subtitles that exc eeds the playback time of the DivXî file will not be displayed. ⢠If the DivXî subtitle file contains more than one subtitle language, you can toggle those by pressing [SUBTITLE] repeatedly. 3dolby .avi SRT SUB SMI Subtitle List Off Cancel Using the Title / Disc Menu Note ⢠Menus vary among discs. Refer t o the information accompanying the dis c for details. ⢠[TOP MENU] or [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] may not work with some discs. ⢠Title menu is also available for SD card with A VCHD files. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
EN 34 SPECIAL PLAYBACK 1) During playback, press [ D (forward)] repeatedly for fast forward. During playback , press [ E (reverse)] repeatedly for fast reverse. Every time you press [ D (forward)] or [ E (reverse)] , the playback speed will change. 2) Press [ B ( play)] to return to the normal playback. 1) During playback, press [ F (pause)] . Then press [ D (forward)]. Every time you press [ D (forward)] , the playback speed changes in 3 different levels. 2) Press [ B ( play)] to return to the normal playback. 1) In pause mode, press [ F (pause)] repeatedly. Every time you press [ F (pause)] , playback will advance one step at a time. 2) Press [ B ( play)] to return to the normal playback. During playback, you can zoom up the picture. . 1) During playback, press [ZOOM] repeatedly. Every time you press [ZOOM] , zoom factor will change. e.g.) DVD-video 2) You can move over the zoomed picture using [ K / L / s / B ]. The gray box with an inner blue box displayed at the right bottom corner of the zoo med image is the position guide. The inner blue box indicates the zoomed area. (Not available for the JPEG and photo files on DLNA home server.) 3) Press [ZOOM] repeatedly to return to the normal playback. Fast Forward / Fast Reverse Note ⢠F or BD, DVD and A VCHD, speed changes in 5 different lev els. ⢠F or audio CD, DivXî, MP3, Windo ws Media⢠Audio, and video / audio files on DLNA home server , speed changes in 3 different levels . ⢠F or some video / music files on DLNA home ser ver or DivXî files , fast forward / fast reverse may not functi on. Slow Forward Playback Note ⢠Only slow forward is available. ⢠F or some video files on DLNA home ser ver or DivXî files , slow forwar d may not function. Step by Step Playback Note ⢠Only step by step forward is available. Zoom Note ⢠F or JPEG files, slide show of the zoomed pic ture is not possible. ⢠For some DivXî files , zoom may not be available. ⢠F or DivXî and JPEG files, 4x z oom is not available. ⢠For some DVDs , 4x zoom is not available. ⢠[ZOOM] does not work during the playback of the BD-vide o. ⢠[ZOOM] does not work while DVD menu is displayed. ⢠For JPEG files, when changing the zoom factor or moving the zoom position, the screen ma y become black for a moment. T his is not a malfunction. Zoom Zoom 1.2x 2x
35 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN EN Available repeat function varies depending on the discs. 1) During playback, press [REPEAT] repeatedly to select the desired repeat function. You can play back the specific part (between point A and point B) repeatedly. 1) During playback, press [REPEAT A-B] once at the point where you want to set point A. 2) During playback, press [REPEAT A-B] again at the point where you want to set point B. As soon as you s et point B, the part between po int A and point B will start to play repeatedly. To cancel A-B repeat: Press [REPEAT A-B] repea tedly until âÂÂOffâ appears. 1) Follow steps 1 to 3 in âÂÂPlaying Back an Audio CD or a Disc with DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG Filesâ on pages 27-28. 2) Open the folder which cont ains the desired JPEG files. 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired f ile to be played back, then press [ B (play)] or [OK]. ⢠An image will be played back fr om the selected file and go to the next one in turn every 10 seconds. 4) Press [ C (stop)] to stop playback. To return to the first item: Press [TOP MENU] . To return to the file played last: Press [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] . Repeat Playback REPEAT MODE AVAILABLE MEDIA Chapter Repeat The current chapter will be played back repeatedly. Title Repeat The current title will be played back repeatedly. Track Repeat The current track or file w ill be played back repeatedly. All Repeat All tracks in the media will be played back repeatedly. Group Repeat The current group (folder) will be played back repeatedly. Random Repeat (Audio CD) Repeats the random playback. Random Repeat (DivXî / MP3 / Windows Media⢠Audio / JPEG) Repeats the random playback in a folder. Note ⢠The repeat setting will be canc elled when you stop playback. ⢠If you press [REPEAT A-B] when the repeat setting for BD , DVD, CD , A VCHD, DivXî file or video file on DLNA home ser ver is set, the repeat setting will be cancelled. ⢠When the repeat setting is set for a MP3 or WMA folder (file), the repeat setting will be cancelled if you select other MP3 or WMA f older (file) to play back. ⢠F or some video / music / photo files on DLNA home server or DivXî files, repeat pla yback may not functi on. A-B Repeat Note ⢠Point B should be set within the same title, track or file as point A. ⢠If you press [REPEAT A-B] when the repeat setting for BD , DVD , CD, A VCHD , DivXî file or video file on DLNA home ser ver is set, the repeat setting will be cance lled. ⢠For some video files on DLNA home server or DivXî files, A-B repeat playback may not function. ⢠T o cancel the A point which was set, press [CLEAR] . Slide Show Note ⢠Large -size JPEG files take a few moments to be displayed. Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
36 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN Some BD-videos have the PiP function which enables you to display the secondary video in the primary video. You can call up the secondary video by pressing [BONUSVIEW (PiP)] whenever the scene contains the secondary video. 1) During playback, press [BONUSVIEW (PiP)]. PiP information will appear. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the secondary video you want to show. ⢠The secondary vide o will be displayed with the secondar y audio. â¢U s e [ s / B] to switch between current setting and âÂÂOf f â . 3) Press [BACK U ] to remove the PiP information. ⢠On how to output the secondar y audio , refer to âÂÂSwitching Au dio Soundtrack â on page 38 and âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â on page 47. You can enjoy BD-Live which enables you to use interactive features when th e unit is connected to the Internet. Examples of BD-Live features: ⢠Online access to additional conten t such as movie trailers, subtitles, BD-Jav a app lications, etc. ⢠While dow nloading, special video data may be played back. - Service and functions differ depe nding on the disc. Follow the instructions given by the disc when using the BD-Live function. - You must insert an SD Memory Card when using the BD-Live function. (SD Memory Card of 1GB or more is recommended.) - Do not remove the SD Memory Card when using the BD-Live function. PiP (BONUSVIEW) Setting Primary video Secondary video Enjoying BD-Live Discs with Int ernet Note ⢠Y ou must connect the unit to the Internet and set up necessary settings in order to use BD-Live. ⢠For the network connection, refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. ⢠For the network setup , refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 57. ⢠F or cer tain discs, f or âÂÂBD-Live Settingâ may need to be changed . ⢠Depending on your connection environment, it may take time to connect to the Internet or t he Internet may not be connected. ⢠When BD-Live functions are used and the unit is connected to the Internet, you may be charged f or this communication. ⢠Some discs with BD -Live function require memory when playing back the content. If you cannot play back a disc with BD -Live function, inser t an SD card(1GB or more) which is formatted on this unit. Note for AACS Online ⢠The player or disc IDs may be sent to the content provider when playing back a disc with BD-Live function. ⢠If you save your viewing hist or y on the ser ver by using these IDs, y ou will be introduced t o other similar movies. ⢠Y ou can save game score histories.
37 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN EN 1) During playback, press [ T (next)] to skip the current title or chapter and move to the next. The title or chapter will move forward by one at a time. ⢠If there is no chapter in on e title, the curr ent title may be skip ped. To go back to the beginning of the current title or chapter, press [ S (previous)] . Press [ S (previous)] repeatedly to go to the previous title or chapter. The title or chapter may move backward one at a time. 1) During playback, press [INFO ]. e.g.) DVD 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂTitleâ or âÂÂChapterâÂÂ. 3) Use [the Number buttons] or [ s / B ] to enter the title / chapter number. 4) Press [OK]. Playback will start from t he beginning of the title / chapter. 5) Press [INFO ] to remove the information display. Title Search In stop mode, enter the title number you want to search using [the Number buttons]. Playback of the title will start in a few seconds. Chapter Search During playback of a title, enter the chapter numbe r you want to search using [the Number buttons]. Playback of the chapter will start in a few seconds. 1) During playback, press [ T (next)] to skip the current track or file and move to the next. The track / file will move forward one at a time. To go back to the beginning of the current track / file press [ S (previous)] . Press it repeatedly to go to the previous track / file. The track / file will move backward one at a time. 1) During playback, press [INFO ]. ⢠F or DivXî files and video files o n DLNA ser ver , skip to step 3). e.g.) DVD 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂPlaying TimeâÂÂ. 3) Use [the Number buttons] to enter the time count you want to jump to. e.g.) Entering 1 hour 45 minutes and 15 seconds. Press 4) Press [OK]. Playback will start f rom the desired time count. 5) Press [INFO ] to remove the information display. Title / Chapter Search Using [ S (previous)] / [ T (next)] Using [INFO ] Using [the Number buttons] (Direct Search) Note ⢠As for the BD-video, how it performs will be strongly determined by the disc, and may not perform as described. 001/023 00:01:31 Dolby Digital 001/012 Disc Title Chapter Playing Time Audio Track Search Using [ S (prev ious)] / [ T (next)] Time Search Note ⢠For some video files on DLNA home server or DivXî files, time sear ch may not function. 001/023 00:01:31 Dolby Digital 001/012 Disc Title Chapter Playing Time Audio Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
38 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN Some video materials may have subtitles in one or more languages. For commercially available discs, the supported languages can b e found on the disc case. Follow the steps below to switch the subtitle language during playback. 1) During playback, press [SUBTITLE] repeatedly to display âÂÂPrimaryâÂÂ, âÂÂSecondaryâ or âÂÂSubtitle StyleâÂÂ. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select your desired subtitle or style. â¢U s e [ s / B] to switch between current subtitle setting and âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 3) Press [SUBTITLE] repeatedly to exit. 1) During playback, press [SUBTITLE]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select your desired subtitle. â¢U s e [ s / B] to switch between current subtitle setting and âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 3) Press [SUBTITLE] to exit. When playing back video material recorded with two or more soundtracks (these are often in different audio languages or audio formats), you can switch them during playback. For BD, available audio varies depending on âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setting. Refer to page 47 for more information. 1) During playback, press [AUDIO] repeatedly to display âÂÂPrimaryâ or âÂÂSecondaryâÂÂ. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct your desired audio stream channel. ⢠F or âÂÂSecondary âÂÂ, use [ s / B] to switch between current audio setting and âÂÂOff âÂÂ. 3) Press [AUDIO] repeatedly to exit. 1) During playback, press [AUDIO]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct your desired audio stream channel. 3) Press [AUDIO] to exit. Switching Subtitles âÂÂPrimaryâ : Sets the subtitle for the primary video. âÂÂSecondaryâ : Sets the subtitle for the secondary video. âÂÂSubtitle Styleâ : Sets style of the subtitle. Note ⢠Some discs will only al low you to change the subtitles from the disc menu or pop-up menu. Press [TOP MENU] or [DISC MENU / POP- UP MENU] to display the disc menu or pop-up menu. ⢠If the disc has no subtitle language or subtitle style, âÂÂNot Available â will be di splayed on the T V screen. ⢠During playback of the secondar y video, the primar y subtitle setting is not available except when there is no subtitle for the secondary video. ⢠F or DivXî ex ternal subtitle, âÂÂPlaying Back DivXî with DivXî External Subtitleâ on page 33. 1 Primar y English 1 Subtitle English Switching Audio Soundtrack âÂÂPrima ryâ : Sets the audio for the primary video. âÂÂSecondaryâ : Sets the audio for the secondary video. Note ⢠The secondary aud io will not be output when the secondar y video is not displayed or when âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â is set to âÂÂPrimary Audio Only âÂÂ. (F or some BD , secondar y audio will be output even when secondary video is off.) ⢠The sound mode cannot be changed during playback of discs not reco r ded in multiple audio. ⢠Some discs allow changing the audio language setting on the disc menu. (Operation varies depending on the discs. Refer to the manual accomp anying the disc.) ⢠[AUDIO] may not work on some discs with multiple audio streams or channels (e.g. DVDs that allow changing audio setting on the disc menu). ⢠If the disc has no audio language, âÂÂNot Available â will be displayed on the T V screen. ⢠F or DTS-CD (5.1 music disc), selecting audio streams or channels is not available. ⢠Y ou can check the selected audio stream in the information display . T o call up the information display, press [INFO ] during playback. 2 Primar y English Dolby Digital Multi 2 Audio English Dolby Digital Multi
39 SPECIAL PLAYBACK EN EN Some BD-video and DVD-video contain scenes which have been shot simultaneously from various angles. You can change the camera angle when appears on the TV screen. 1) During playback, press [ANGLE]. ⢠The selected a ngle will be displayed on the display bar at the top of the TV screen. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select your desired angle. 3) Press [ANGLE] to exit. With this feature, you can enjoy your TV as a PC monitor wirelessly using your home n etwork. Make s ure you download the Philips Wireless M ediaConnect software and install it on your PC before you perform the steps below. 1) Start your Internet browser on your PC and open the Philips Wireless MediaConnect downloa d page at www.wifimediaconnect.philips.com . On the website, you can check the necessary PC system requirements. 2) Enter the 12 digit code printed on the bottom of your Blu-ray Disc Play er. 3) Click the âÂÂDownload nowâ button to download the free Philips Wireless MediaConnect software. 4) Once downloaded, start the file âÂÂPhilips Wireless MediaConnect_setup.exeâÂÂ. Follow the instructions on the screen to comple te software installation. 1) Launch Philips Wireless MediaConnect on your PC first. 2) Press [ (home)] on the Blu-ray Disc Player remote. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂMediaConnectâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The startup screen for Philips W ireless M ediaConnect will be displayed and the unit searches for an available PC that is running Philips W ireless MediaConnec t soft ware. Once connected, the Philips Wireless MediaConnect software will encode and stream the screen of your PC as a video along with audio. Depending on your computer and network configuration, there will be a delay between your PC screen and the TV but the audio-video will always be in sync. Philips Wireless MediaConnect Help To read the Philips Wireless MediaConnect Help, right click the program icon in the notification t ray of the PC and select Help. Specifics You can project high definition (HD) or standard definition (SD) video, depending on the processing power of your PC. For smooth playback of HD video, please use a hardware accelerated video player on your computer. A hardware accelerated video player uses the graphics adapter of your PC to render HD video rather than the processor. This frees up the pr ocessor for Philips Wireless MediaConnect video encoding. The content protection on most DVD or Blu-ray Disc movi es might restric t watching the movie on TV when the disc is playing on a PC. The TV shows PC media fil es with a small delay. Philips Wirel ess MediaConnect is only available for PC. PC and network requirements Supported OS Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windo ws 7 (PC only) Minimum requirements ⢠Intel Core 2 Duo 1.8GHz ⢠512MB RAM ⢠IEEE 802.11n Recommended requirements ⢠Intel Core 2 Duo 2.1GHz â¢1 G B R A M Switching Camera Angles Note ⢠If â Angle Iconâ setting is set t o âÂÂOff â , will not appear on the T V screen. (Refer to page 50) Philips Wireless MediaConnect Install Philips Wireless MediaConnect Using Philips Wireless MediaConnect 1 / 5 Angle Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
EN 40 NETFLIX OPERATIONS With this unit, you can wa tch movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from Netfli x via the Internet. In order to use this feature, yo u must visit the following website on your PC and become a Netflix member. netflix.com/Philips After creating a Netflix account at netflix.com/Ph ilips , follow the following pr ocedure before activating the connection to Netfl ix. 1) Connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠Refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. 2) Set up the necessary network connection settings. ⢠Refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 5 7. In order to watch movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from Netflix vi a the Internet, you must activa te the connection between this unit and your Netf lix account. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNETFLIXâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Netflix welcome screen will appear . ⢠F or the first time only , âÂÂNetwork Ser vice Disclaimer â screen will appear . After confirming the content, use [ s / B] to select â Agree âÂÂ, then press [OK] . 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂyes - activate instant streaming from NetflixâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Activation screen with the activati on code will appea r . 4) On your PC, visit netflix.com/activate and log into your account. ⢠The entry screen of activation code will appear on your PC screen. 5) Enter the activation code which is displayed on the TV screen. ⢠The instant Queue will appear . The connection to Netflix is successfully made. ⢠T o browse the in stant Queue and watch movies, sk i p to step 3) in â W atching Streaming Movies â on page 40. After you set up the con nection to Netflix , you can browse the instant Queue and watch movies on your TV. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂNETFLIXâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The instant Queue will appear . 3) Use [ s / B ] to select the desired movie or TV episode, then press [ B (play)] to start playback. ⢠After loading, playback of the selected movie or T V episode will star t. ⢠T o stop the playback , press [ C (stop)] . ⢠T o go back to the insta nt Queue, press [Red] . ⢠T o go back to the home men u, press [( h o m e ) ] . Before Activating the Connection to Netflix Activating the Connection to Netflix Note ⢠Netflix is available only in the United States. ⢠Y ou cannot create a Netflix account on this unit. ⢠If newer version of software is required, software upgrade screen may appear after selec ting âÂÂNETFLIXâ in step 2). (F or software upgrade , refe r to âÂÂSoftware Upgrade â on page 62.) ⢠Y ou can deactivate th e connection to N etflix by setting the âÂÂN etflix Deactivateâ to âÂÂY esâÂÂ. (Refer to page 51.) ⢠The screen image of Netflix may change after upgrading the software . ⢠For questions regar ding the Netfli x ser vice, visit netfli x.com/Help . ⢠When you c ontact the Netfli x customer service, you may be asked for the ESN number , which is a serial number to identify this unit by Netfli x . Y ou can check the ESN number on the bottom of the âÂÂNetflix Deactivate â screen. (Refer to page 51. ) Watching Streaming Movies About the Instant Queue ⢠Instant Queue is the list of movies and T V episodes you add on the Netflix website. (netflix.com ) Y ou can manage the movies and T V episodes in your instant Queue from the Netflix website on your PC. ⢠Y ou cannot add movies or T V episodes to your instant Queue on this unit. ⢠Y ou can remove mo vies or T V episodes from the instant Queue on this unit. Note ⢠The picture quality differs depending on the speed of your Internet connection at the time of loading.
41 EN EN CINEMANOW / BLOCKBUSTER OPERATIONS With this unit, you can watch movies and TV episodes stream ed instantly from CinemaNow / Blockbuster via the Internet. In order to use this feature, yo u must visit the fol low ing website and create a CinemaNow / Blockbuster account. - For Cinema Now, visit w ww.cinemanow.com/Logi n - For Blockbus ter, visit www.blockbuster.com/auth /login After creating a CinemaNow / Blockb uster account, fo llow the following procedure before activating the connection to CinemaNow / B lockbuster. 1) Connect this unit to the Internet. ⢠Refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. 2) Set up the necessary network connection settings. ⢠Refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 5 7. In order to watch movies and TV episodes streamed instantly from CinemaNow / Blockbuster via the Internet, you must activate the connectio n between this unit and your CinemaNow / Blockbuster account. 1) On your PC, visit following website and log into your account to get the activation code. ⢠F ollow the instruc tion given by the website. ⢠T ake a note of the ac tivation code which appears on the PC. - For Cinema Now, visit www.cineman ow.com/activate . - For Bloc kbuster, visit www.blockbus ter.com/ activat e/phil ipsbd . 2) On this unit, press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂCinemaNowâ or âÂÂBLOCKBUSTERâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Menu screen of CinemaNow or Blockbuste r will appear . ⢠F or the first time only , âÂÂNetwork Ser vice Disclaimer â screen will appear . After confirming the content, use [ s / B] to select â Agree âÂÂ, then press [OK] . 4) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to sel ect âÂÂSettingsâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂConfigureâ (Blockbuster), then press [OK]. ⢠F or CinemaNo w, select â Activateâ and press [OK] again in the next screen. ⢠Activation code input screen will ap pear . e.g.) CinemaNow 5) Enter the activation co de displayed on your PC using [ s / B ] and [the Number buttons], then select âÂÂActivateâ and press [OK]. ⢠F or CinemaNow, confirmation message will a ppear . Pre ss [OK] to complete th e setting. CinemaNow Blockbuster Before Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Activating the Connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Note ⢠The image of menu screen may change without notice after upgrading the soft ware or the information on CinemaNow / Block buster ser ver is changed . ⢠Y ou cannot create CinemaNow / Blockbuster accoun t on this unit. ⢠T o deactivate the connection to CinemaNow or Blockbuster, selec t âÂÂDeactivateâ in âÂÂSettingsâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂC onfigureâ (Blockbuster). ⢠For questions regar ding CinemaNow ser vice, visit www.cinemanow.com/support . ⢠For questions regar ding Block buster ser vice, visit www.blockbuster.com/ help . Guide to CinemaNow / Blockbuster Menu Screen 1) Movies / Browse : To access the movie list 2) TV Shows : To access the TV show list 3) Search All / Search : To access search screen 4) My Videos / My Library : To access the list of rented or purchased movies / TV episodes 5) Wish List / My Favorites : To access your wish lis t / favorite list 6) Settings / Configure : To access setting / configure menu 7) Help : To access the help p age Movies TV Shows Search All M ovie s TV Show s Search Al l Movies TV Shows Search All My Videos Wish List Settings POWERED BY 12 3 45 6 Help Conï¬Âgure My Favorites My Library Browse Search POWERED BY 1 3 4 5 6 7 Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
42 CINEMANOW / BLOCKBUSTER OPERATIONS EN After you set up the connection to CinemaNow / Blockbuster, y ou can rent or purchase movies / TV episodes and watch directly on your TV. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂCinemaNowâ or âÂÂBLOCKBUSTERâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select âÂÂMoviesâÂÂ, âÂÂBrowseâ or âÂÂTV ShowsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠List of movies / T V episodes will appear . 4) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select the desired title, then press [OK]. ⢠Title details scr een of the selec ted title will appear . 5) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂRentâ or âÂÂBuyâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Checkout screen will appear . 6) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂSubmit OrderâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 7) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂWatch NowâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠If you want to continue br owsing, select âÂÂContinue Browsing â and press [OK] to go back to âÂÂMovies â or âÂÂBrowse âÂÂ. From the search screen, you can search for movies / TV episodes by entering search words. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂRenting or Purchasing Movies / TV episodesâ on page 42. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSearch Allâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂFindâ (Blockbuster), then press [OK]. ⢠Keypad screen will appear . 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select characters, then press [OK]. ⢠When you enter a letter , titles that star t with the letter will be displayed on the right side of the screen. 4) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired title from the search result on the righ t side of the screen, then press [OK]. ⢠Title details scr een of the selec ted title will appear . 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂRenting or Pu rchasing Movies / TV episodesâ on page 42. 2) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select âÂÂMy Videosâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂMy Libraryâ (Blockbuster), then press [OK]. ⢠List of rented or purchased movies / TV episodes will appear . 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired ti tle, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂWatch from Startâ (CinemaNow) or âÂÂPlay Nowâ (Blockbuster), the n press [OK]. ⢠If you want to r esume playback, select "Resume Play" and press [OK] . ⢠T o stop the playback , press [ C (stop)] . ⢠T o pause the playback , press [ F (pause)] . ⢠T o go back to the home men u, press [( h o m e ) ] . Renting or Purchasing Movies / TV episodes Note ⢠If you selec t â Add to Wish List â (CinemaNow) or â Add to My F avoritesâ (Blockbuster) in title details screen, the title will be added to your â Wish List â or âÂÂMy Fa v o r i t e s â . ⢠F or CinemaNow, if you want to redeem a gift code, select âÂÂRede em Gift Code â in the checkout sc reen, then press [OK] and enter the gift code. ⢠In most cases, rented mo vies or T V episodes are available for 24 hours from the playback starting time. Searching Movies / TV episodes Watching Rented or Purchase d Movies / TV episodes Note ⢠Depending on your network environment and speed, t he playback may be paused or stopped. T o improve pla yback condition, use high speed broadband Internet connection (For details , contact your Internet ser vice provider.)
43 EN EN VUDU OPERATIONS With this unit, you can enj oy VUDU HD on-demand movies / TV episodes an d Internet applications. In order to use this feature, you mus t connect this unit to the Int ernet. (Broadband Internet conne ction of 8 Mbps or faster is recommended.) - For network connecti on, refer to âÂÂConnection to the Networkâ on page 20. - For network setup, refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 57. For complete instructions on using VUDU service, please visit www.vudu.com/docs to view an updated in-depth online manual. After you set up the net work connection, you must set up a VUDU account and activate this unit before watc hing VUDU movies. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂvuduâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠VUDU App Home scr een will appear . ⢠F or the first time only , âÂÂNetwork Ser vice Disclaimer â screen will appear . After confirming the content, use [ s / B] to select â Agree âÂÂ, then press [OK] . 3) Use [ K / L / s / B ] to select âÂÂVUDU moviesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠VUDU welcome screen will appear . 4) Select âÂÂSIGN Up NowâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 5) Enter the e-mail address you would l ike associat ed with your VUDU account. A f ter yo u enter your e -mail address correctly, select âÂÂDoneâ and press [ OK]. ⢠Activation e -ma il will be sent to the e -mail add ress. ( Y ou must have access to the e-mail address to activate VUDU.) 6) Follow directions in the activation e-mail to complete your account activation. App Home screen is the entry point to VUDU applications including VUDU movies. When you select âÂÂVUDU moviesâ in App Home screen, VUDU movies home screen will appear. Activating VUDU Note ⢠Y ou can deac tivate the conne ction to VUDU by setting â Vudu Deactivate â to â Y esâÂÂ. (Refer to pa ge 51.) ⢠For question s regardi ng VUDU ser vice, pleas e cont act VUDU Cus tomer Care at 1-888-554-V UDU (8838) or visit www.vudu.com/support . Guide to VUDU Menu Screen App Home Screen 1) Viewing mode : List of different viewing modes for App Home applications 2) Promotional graphics : Placeho lder where promotional graphics are displayed 3) Application list : Grid of applications in the selected viewing mode VUDU Movies Home Screen 1) Most Watched : To access the list of popular movies / TV episodes on VUDU 2) New on Vudu : To access the list of newly available movies / TV episodes 3) Explore Catalog : To access the list of options to search movies / TV episodes 4) My Vudu : To access the list of rented or purchased contents Note ⢠Y ou can go bac k to VUDU movies home screen by pressing [Blue] while you are using VUDU movies features. Most Popular 1 2 3 My Fav orites Most Popular Newest Browse by Genre 12 3 4 Most W atched New on V udu Explore Catalog My Vu d u Introduction Connections Basic Setup Playback Others Fu nction S etup
44 VUDU OPERATIONS EN After activating this unit, you are ready to purchase or rent movies / TV episodes and wa tch directly on your TV. 1) Select a desired movie or TV episode by navigating VUDU movies menus. Press [OK] to display the âÂÂMOVIE DETAILSâ screen. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂRent / OwnâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select a desired quali ty option, then press [OK]. ⢠Select the quality option that best suits your network environment. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂRent for $*.**â or âÂÂBuy for $*.**âÂÂ, then press [OK] to confirm your rental or purchase. 5) Select âÂÂWatch Nowâ to start playing the movie / TV episode. ⢠If you want to return to the âÂÂMOVIE DE T AILSâÂÂ, selec t âÂÂW at ch La te râÂÂ. 1) In VUDU movies home screen, select âÂÂMy Vuduâ and press [OK]. 2) Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂMy RentalsâÂÂ, âÂÂMy Moviesâ or âÂÂMy TV ShowsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select a desired movie / TV episode, then press [OK]. 4) Select âÂÂWatchâ or âÂÂWatch ***â to start watching the movie / TV episode. ⢠During playback , use following buttons to control the playback. In addition to VUDU movies, you can use various kinds of Internet applications. 1) In App Home screen, use [ K / L / s / B ] to select a desired application and press [OK]. 2) Follow the instructions on screen of the selected application. Renting or Purchasing VUDU Movies Video Resolution Minimum Bit Rate SD 480p 1 Mbps HD 720p 2.25 Mbps HDX 1080p 4.5 Mbps Note ⢠A vailable quality op tions differ de pending on th e content. Watching Rented or Purchased VUDU movies Button Action [ F (pause)] Pause the playback. [ C (stop)] Stop the playback. [ E (reverse)] / [ D (forward)] Fast reverse or forward the playback. [ B (play )] Resume the playback. [Yellow] Display the info banner which shows the playback information. [( h o m e ) ] Go back to the home menu. Note ⢠Availa ble buttons and actions ma y subject to change without notice . Using Internet Applications Note ⢠Availa ble applications may change without no tice.
45 EN EN LIST OF SETTINGS In the settings menu, you can cu stomize the various kinds of settings as you prefer. Refer to the following instruc tion to navigate throug h the settings menus. 1) Press [ (home)] to access the home menu. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to move the highlight up and down in the list. ⢠Options of the highlighted item will be displa yed in the list on the right whenever available. 5) To make a selection or to access options of an item, sele ct the desired item, then press [OK]. ⢠T o go back to the previous screen, press [BACK U ] . 6) Press [ (home)] to exit. Refer to the following ta ble for the types of settings y ou can customize. The item highlighted in gray is the default setting. Category Menus / Opti ons Description 3D Outpu t This feature is available only when the display device is connected by an HDMI cable. Auto (XX) Sets the 3D output mode for playback of Blu-ray 3D Discs. âÂÂAuto (XX)âÂÂ: Playback picture will be output in 3D or 2D mode, depending on a disc or the connected TV. (Inside the parenthesis next to âÂÂAutoâ will be the current output mode.) âÂÂ3DâÂÂ: Outputs the picture in 3D mode. âÂÂ2DâÂÂ: Outputs the picture in 2D mode. 3D 2D Language Audio Default Sets the audio languag e for BD-video, DVD-video or AVCHD playback. ⢠If y ou select âÂÂDefaultâÂÂ, the discâ s original language will be in effect. Ceà ¡tina Dansk Deutsch English Español Français Italiano Magyar Nederlands Norsk Polski Português àÃÂÃÂÃÂúøù suomi Svenska Türkçe Subtitle Off Sets the subtitle language for BD- video, DVD-video or AVCHD playback. Ceà ¡tina Dansk Deutsch English Español Français Italiano Magyar Nederlands Norsk Polski Português àÃÂÃÂÃÂúøù suomi Svenska Türkçe Disc Menu Ceà ¡tina Dansk Deutsch Norsk Polski Português àÃÂÃÂÃÂúøù suomi Svenska Türkçe Sets the language for disc menu. English Español Français Italiano Magyar Nederlands Player Menu Auto (XXXX) Sets th e language for player menu (OSD menu) âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Activates the Get & Set Menu Language function. Refer to page 62. ⢠â Autoâ is available only when âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CEC)â is set to âÂÂOnâÂÂ. ⢠Inside the par enthesis next to â Auto â will be the current selected language . English Español Français Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
46 LIST OF SETTINGS EN Category Menus / Opti ons Description Video Output TV Shape ⢠Ref er to page 52 for more information. 4:3 Normal 4:3 Crop 16:9 Widescre en Sets the aspect ratio of the playback image to fit your TV. 16:9 Squeeze HDMI Video HDMI 1080p/24 ⢠This feature is avai labl e only when the display device is connec ted by an HDMI cable. ⢠Ref er to page 52 for more information. Auto âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Outputs the pictu re in 1080p/24 (1080 progressive with 24 frames per second) when it meets all the conditions listed below: ⢠Th e video resolution and the fram e rate of the material is 10 80p/24 . ⢠âÂÂHDMI V ideo Resolutionâ setting is set to âÂÂ1080pâÂÂ. ⢠Th e display device suppor ts the 1080p/24 output. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: ⢠O u t p u t s t h e p i c t u r e i n 1 0 8 0 p / 6 0 . (60 frames per second, progressive) Off HDMI Vide o Resolution ⢠This feature is avai labl e only when the display device is connec ted by an HDMI cable. ⢠Ref er to page 52 for more information. Auto Sets the resolution of th e video signal being output fr om the HDMI OUT jack. ⢠Th e selected resolution must also be suppor ted by your T V monitor. 480p 720p 1080i 1080p HDMI Deep Color ⢠This feature is avai labl e only when the display device is connec ted by an HDMI cable, and when i t sup por t s Dee p Col or fea tu re. Auto Reduces the posterization effect of the playback picture. âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Reduces the posterization effect by automatically outputting up to 3 6 bit color whenever the unit recognizes the connected display device supports Deep Color feature. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: Outputs the standard 24 bit color. Off Component Output 480i Sets resolution for component output picture. ⢠Th e selected resolution must also be suppor ted by your T V monitor. ⢠Ref er also to your TV â s manual. ⢠If you hav e selected the reso lution not s upp or ted by your T V by mi stake and the pic ture gets dist urbed, press and hold [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its default. ⢠W hen HDMI cable is connected, only âÂÂ480iâ and the resolutio n selected in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolution â will be avail ab le. 480p 720p 1080i With regard to DVD-video with copy protection, the resolution will be set to 480p regardless of the setting here. If 480p output is not available, 480i will be output.
47 LIST OF SETTINGS EN EN Category Menus / Opti ons Description Video Output De-interlacing Mode Auto âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Automatically det ects film or video content, and appropriately converts it. âÂÂVideoâÂÂ: Select this option when the picture is distorted when using âÂÂAutoâÂÂ. Video Black L evel On Adjusts brightness to compensate for ambient room light. Off HD Noise Reduction On Reduces no ise of the playback picture. âÂÂOnâÂÂ: Activates Noise Reduction. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: Deactivates No ise Reducti on. Off Audio Night Mode Auto Compresses range between soft and loud sounds. âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Night Mode will be activated automatically when Dolby TrueHD audio is played back. âÂÂOnâÂÂ: Activates the Night Mode. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: Deactivates the Night Mode. On Off Down Sampling On Sets the sampling rate for outpu tting PCM audio from the digital output (coaxial). âÂÂOnâÂÂ: Over 96 kHz PCM audio wil l be down sampled at 48 kHz. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: For BD or DVD recorded in LPCM wi th ou t c o pyr i gh t p ro t ec ti on , 2-channel audio signals up to 96 kHz are output as LPCM signal s. Off Virtual Surround On Select âÂÂO nâ to enjoy stereophonic virtual space through your existing 2 channel stereo system during playback of B D-video or DVD-vide o. Off Blu-ray Disc A udio Mix Audio Output âÂÂMix Audio Outpu tâÂÂ: The audio for the secondary video and the interactive application will be output together with the audio for the primary video. âÂÂPrimary Au dio OnlyâÂÂ: Only audio for the primary video will be output. When playing back a BD-video which only contains primary audio, the audio output will be the same case as âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ even if the âÂÂBlu- ray Disc Audioâ is set to âÂÂMix Audi o OutputâÂÂ. Primary Audio Only Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
48 LIST OF SETTINGS EN Category Menus/Options Description Audio HDMI Audio â¢T h i s f e a t u r e i s availa ble on ly wh en the display device is connected by an HDMI cable . ⢠Ref er to page 53 for more information. HDMI Normal Sets the audio format for sound output from the HDMI OUT jack. PCM Off Digital Out ⢠When HD MI cable is connected, make sure âÂÂHDMI Audio â setting is set to âÂÂOff â to chang e the âÂÂDigital Outâ setting. ⢠Ref er to page 55 for more information. Bitstream Sets the audio format for the sound output from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack. PCM Ratings Lock ⢠Ref er to page 56 for more information. Rating Level All Sets the rating level for the disc playback. 8 [Adult] to 1 [Kid Safe] New PIN Sets the new password for the âÂÂRatings Lockâ setting.
49 LIST OF SETTINGS EN EN Category Menus / Options Description Network Connection ⢠Refer to pages 57-61 for mor e information. Connection Test Perform a network connection test. After you change IP address or DNS setting, always perform this test. Network Selection Wired Connection Standard If you sel ect âÂÂStanda rdâ , connection test will automatically sta rt. Manual IP Address Setting Auto(DHCP) Set the IP address. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default setting. Manual IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Setting Auto(DHCP) Set the DNS setting. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default setting. Manual Primary DNS Second ary DNS Proxy Setting Do Not Use Set the proxy server. In most case s, you can connect to the Internet without using proxy server. Use Proxy Address Proxy Port Connection Speed Auto Set the connection speed. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default setti ng. 10BASE Half 10BASE Full 100BASE Half 100BASE Full BD-Live Setting Allow You can restrict Inte rnet access when BD-Liv e functions are used . Limited Allow Prohibit Network Status You can check the current status of the network setting. Wireless Connection Wireless Router Find wireless network WEP/WPA Authenti- cation Set up the connection to the wireless router and enter the WEP/WPA key required for wireless network connecti on. Manually enter your SSID Wireless Router Status You can check the cur rent status of the wireless router setting. Advanced Settings Standard If you select âÂÂStanda rdâ , connection test will automatically start. Manual IP Address Setting Set the IP address. In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any chan ges to the default setting. DNS Setting Set the DNS set ting. In most cases, you can conne ct to th e Intern et with out making an y changes to the de fault setting . Proxy Setting Set the proxy server. In most case s, you can connect to the Internet without using proxy server. BD-Live Setting You can restrict Internet access when BD-Liv e functions are used . Network Status You can chec k the current status of the network setting. Disable Yes Deactivates the network connection. No Disclaimer Displays the network service disclaimer. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
50 LIST OF SETTINGS EN Category Menus / Options Descrip tion Others Angle Icon On âÂÂOnâÂÂ: The angle icon automatically appears on the TV screen when playing back conte nt with various camera angles available. âÂÂOffâÂÂ: The angle icon does not automatically appear on the TV screen when playing back content with various camera angles available. Off Front Panel Brightness Bright Dim Sets the brightness of the front panel display. When âÂÂAutoâ is selected, the front panel display automatically goes dim during playback. Auto Screen Saver On Sets whether to activate the screen saver after 5 minutes of no action on the unit. Off Slide Show Transition Cut In/Out Sets the visual effect for the slide show transition mode. âÂÂCut In/OutâÂÂ: The pictu res will cu t in and out sharply as playback progre sses. âÂÂFade In/OutâÂÂ: The pictures will fade in and out as playback progresses . Fade In/Out DivXî VOD Registration Co de Your re gistration code is : cccccccccc To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod This menu item provides you with the DivXî VOD registration code. The DivXî registration code is re quired when downloading DivXî VOD files from the Internet. To learn more about DivXî VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod. Deactivation Code Your de activat ion code is : cccccccc To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod This menu item provides you with the DivXî VOD deactivatio n code. The DivXî deactivation code is required when re-downloading DivXî VOD files from the Internet after deactivating. To learn more about DivXî VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod. Deactivation Y es This menu deactivates this unit and provides you with new registration code and deactivati on code in order to download DivXî VOD files fro m the Internet. No EasyLink (HDMI CEC) â¢T h i s f e a t u r e i s availa ble on ly wh en the display device is connected with an HDMI cable, and when it supports EasyLink (HDMI CEC) feat ure. ⢠Ref er to page 62 for more information. On Sets whether to utilize the EasyLink (HDMI CEC) function. EasyLink (HDMI CEC) function allows your PHILIPS brand EasyLink TV to act in conjunction with this unit or vice versa. Off
51 LIST OF SETTINGS EN EN Category Menus / Options Description Others Software Upgrade ⢠Ref er to page 62 for m ore information. Disc Upgrade Yes Set the disc upgrade. You can upgrade the software version by using a disc. To download the latest software version, please visit www.philips.com/support. No Network Upgrade Yes Set the network upgrade. You can upgrade the software version by connecting this unit to the Internet. No Product Info Displays the product info screen. Factory Default Settings Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Resets all the settings, except for âÂÂRating s Lockâ and âÂÂNet work ConnectionâÂÂ, in âÂÂSettingsâ to the factory default. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the initialization. No Format S D Card Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Re-format SD card. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not format the SD card. No Local Stor age Player Y es âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Re-format local sto rage (Player) used for BD-Java. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the initialization. No SD Card Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Re-format local storage (SD card) used for BD-Java. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not format the SD card. No Network Settings Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Initializes manually entered or automatic (default) network settings. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the initialization. No Netflix Deactivate Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Deactivates the connection to Netflix. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the deactivation. No Vudu Deactivate Yes âÂÂYesâÂÂ: Deactivates the connection to VUDU. âÂÂNoâÂÂ: Does not perform the deactivation. No Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
EN 52 SETUPS Use this feature to adjust the aspect ratio of the video source which is different from yo ur TVâÂÂs ratio to fit your TV monitor without distorting the picture. D escriptions of each setting are as follows: Set the resolution of the video signal being output from the HDMI OUT jack. You can select the desi red âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ among the settings listed below: âÂÂAutoâÂÂ,âÂÂ480pâÂÂ,âÂÂ720pâÂÂ,âÂÂ1080iâÂÂ,âÂÂ1080pâ â¢ When you make a selection, the T V monitor temporarily goes blank and then comes back again. I f it does not, press [HDMI] to change the resolution or press and hold [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its de fault. Actual Output Resolution by Media: (*1) To output the video i n 24 Hz, the connected d isplay device must support 24 Hz output, and âÂÂHDMI 1080p/24â should be set to âÂÂAutoâÂÂ. Otherwise, the ima ge will be output in 60 Hz. ⢠When HDMI cable is connected, only âÂÂ480iâ and the resolution selected in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ will be available for the âÂÂC omponent Output âÂÂ. ⢠Composit e video out (VIDEO OUT ) can only o utput 480i/60. ⢠F or A VCHD and DivXî, outputting the video in 24 Hz (1080p/24) is not a vailable. TV Shape home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂVideo Outputâ A âÂÂTV Shape â Video source Your TV Option Description 16:9 4:3 4:3 Normal To enjoy 16:9 picture on 4:3 monitor: 16:9 picture is scaled down until both sides of the picture fits the 4:3 TV. 4:3 Crop To enjoy 16:9 picture on 4:3 monitor: Both sides of the picture are trimmed to fit the 4:3 TV without distorting the aspect r atio of the picture. 16:9 16:9 Widescreen To enjoy 16:9 picture on 16:9 monitor: Select this setting when you want to enjoy 16:9 picture on the 16:9 TV. 4:3 16:9 Squeeze To enjoy 4:3 picture on 16:9 monitor: Use this setting to display 4:3 picture on the 16:9 TV without distorting the aspect ratio of the picture. HDMI Video Resolution home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂVideo Output â A âÂÂHDMI Videoâ A âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ Media BD Setting in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ Source 480i/60 720p/60 1080i/60 720p/24 1080p/24 480p 480p/60 480p/60 480p/60 480p/60 480p/60 720p 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 1080i 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080p 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/24 or 60 (*1) Auto The highest re solution support ed by your display device will be in effect automatical ly. Media DVD AVCHD DivXî Photo viewing OSD-only viewing Setting in the âÂÂHDMI Video Resolutionâ Source 480i/60 1080p/24 60, 30, other 480p 480p/60 480p/60 48 0p/60 4 80p/60 480p/6 0 720p 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 720p/60 1080i 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080i/60 1080p 1080p /60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 1080p/60 Auto The highest resolution su pported by your display device will be in eff ect automatically. Note ⢠The selected resolution must also be s uppor ted by your display device. ⢠If your T V and the unit is connected by a DVI cable and if you select â Auto âÂÂ, âÂÂ480pâ will be in effe c t automatically. â¢P r e s s i n g [ B (play)] on the front panel for 5 seconds changes the setting back to its default. (âÂÂCo mponent Output â setting will also be reset to default (480i) .) ⢠Refer also to your TV â s manual. ⢠When the HDMI OUT jack is outputting the video in 1080p/24, picture will not be output from the VIDEO OUT jack and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. ⢠When playing back a F rame Sequential 3D Disc, video resolution of output picture will depend on contents on the disc. (âÂÂHDMI V ideo Resolution â setting is not effective for F rame Sequential 3D Discs.)
53 SETUPS EN EN Refer to the table below to see which setting you should choose. HDMI Audio home A âÂÂSetti ngsâ A âÂÂAudioâ A âÂÂHDMI Audioâ âÂÂHDMI Audioâ setting A âÂÂHDMI Normalâ âÂÂPCMâ âÂÂOffâ âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setti ng A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ âÂÂPrimary Au dio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Regardle ss Media ê Audio Source ê Which audio format can be output depends on the compat ibility of the connected device. BD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *1 or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *2 or Mute Multi PCM *1 or Mute Multi PCM *2 or Mute Mute Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *3 or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *4 or Mute Multi PCM *3 or Mute Multi PCM *4 or Mute Mute DTSî DTSî or Multi PCM or Mute DTSî or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DTS-HDî DTS-HDî or DTSî or Multi PCM *1 or Mute DTSî or Multi PCM *5 or Mute Multi PCM *1 or Mute Multi PCM *5 or Mute Mute LPCM Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DVD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital, Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DTSî DTSî, Multi PCM or Mu te Multi PCM or Mute Mute LPCM 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute DTS-CD DTSî DTSî, Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute AVCHD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute LPCM Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
54 SETUPS EN *1 ) Full decoded. *2 ) Only the independent su bstream is decoded. *3 ) Dolby TrueHD stream is decoded. *4 ) Only the Dolby Digital substream is decod ed. *5 ) Only the core substream is dec oded. ⢠When playing back a BD-video which only contains the primar y audio, the audio output will be the same case as the âÂÂPrimary Audio Only â even if th e âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â is set to âÂÂM ix Audio Output âÂÂ. âÂÂHDMI Audioâ setting A âÂÂHDMI Normalâ âÂÂPCMâ âÂÂOffâ âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setti ng A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ âÂÂPrimary Au dio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Regardle ss Media ê Audio Source ê Which audio format can be output depends on the compat ibility of the connected device. DivXî Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute MP3 / MP2 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute Audio CD PCM 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute MP3 MP3 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute Windows Media⢠Audio WMA 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute DLNA Video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital or Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute MP2 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute LPCM Multi PCM or Mute Multi PCM or Mute Mute DLNA Music MP3 / WMA / LPCM 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute Netflix WMA 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute CinemaNow AAC 2ch AAC or PCM or Mute PCM or Mute Mute Blockbuster AAC 2ch AAC or PCM or Mute PCM or Mute Mute VUDU Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *1 or Mute Dolby Digital or Multi PCM *2 or Mute Multi PCM *1 or Mute Multi PCM *2 or Mute Mute MP3 2ch PCM or Mute 2ch PCM or Mute Mute
55 SETUPS EN EN Refer to the table below to see which setting you should choose. *1 ) Full decoded. *2 ) Only the independent su bstream is decoded. *3 ) Dolby TrueHD stream is decoded. *4 ) Only the Dolby Digital substream is decod ed. *5 ) Only the core substream is dec oded. ⢠When playing back a BD-video which only contains the primar y audio, the audio output will be the same case as the âÂÂPrimary Audio Only â even if th e âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audio â is set to âÂÂM ix Audio Output âÂÂ. Digital Out home A âÂÂSetti ngsâ A âÂÂAudioâ A âÂÂDigital Outâ âÂÂDigital Outâ setting A âÂÂBitstreamâ âÂÂPCMâ âÂÂBlu-ray Disc Audioâ setting A âÂÂPrimary Audio Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ âÂÂPrimary Aud io Onlyâ âÂÂMix Audio Outputâ Media ê Audio Source ê BD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch PC M *2 Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM *3 DownMix 2ch PC M *4 DTSî DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DTS-HDî DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch PC M *5 LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DVD-video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM DTS-CD DTSî DTSî DownMix 2ch PCM AVCHD Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DivXî Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP3 / MP2 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Audio CD PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM MP3 MP3 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Windows Media⢠Audio WMA 2ch PCM 2ch PCM DLNA Video Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM MP2 2ch PCM 2ch PCM LPCM DownMix 2ch PCM DownMix 2ch PCM DLNA Music MP3 / WMA / LPCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Netflix WMA 2ch PCM 2ch PCM CinemaNow AAC 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Blockbuster AAC 2ch PCM 2ch PCM VUDU Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DownMix 2ch PCM *1 DownMix 2ch PC M *2 MP3 2ch PCM 2ch PCM Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
56 SETUPS EN Some BD-video or DVD-video feature a ratings lock level. Playback will stop if the rating s exceed th e levels you set, it will require you to enter a password before the disc will play back. This feature prevents your children from viewing inappropriate material. 1) With âÂÂRatings Lockâ selected in the âÂÂSettingsâ menu, press [OK]. 2) If a PIN code has not been set, proceed to step 2-a). If a PIN code has already been set, proceed to step 2-b). If you want to change the PIN code , proceed to step 2-c). If you forget the PIN code, proceed to step 2-d). 2-a) Enter 4 digit PIN code using [the Number buttons] . ⢠âÂÂ4737â cannot be used. ⢠Press [Red] to return to the previous screen. 2-b) Enter 4 digit PIN code using [the Number buttons] . 2-c) Follow step 2-b). Select âÂÂNew PINâÂÂ, then press [OK] . Enter the new PIN code. 2-d) Enter âÂÂ4737âÂÂ. Current PIN code and the âÂÂRatings Lockâ settings are now cleared. Follow step 1) and step 2-a) to create a new PIN code. 3) After entering the PIN code, âÂÂRating Levelâ appears. (If not, use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂRating LevelâÂÂ.) Select desired rating level then press [OK]. To cancel ratings lock temporarily Some discs allow you to cancel the ratings lock temporarily. With those discs, the message below will appear when you try to play them back. âÂÂPlease enter your PIN to unblock content. â Follow the instruction which appears on the TV screen to cancel the ratings lock. After entering the PIN code, âÂÂRating Levelâ appears. Select desired rating level, then press [OK]. Ratings Lock home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂRati ngs Lockâ Language 3D Output Video Output Audio Ratings Loc k Rating Lev el New PIN Others F actor y Default Network Connection Enter new PIN. Enter your PIN. RATING EXPLANATIONS All ⢠Ratings Lock Con trol is inactive; all discs can play back. 8 [Adult] ⢠DVD sof tware of any grades (adult / general / children) can be played back. 7 [NC-17] ⢠No one under 17 admitted. 6 [R] ⢠Restricted; under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult guardian. 5 [PGR] ⢠P arental Guidance Recommended. 4 [PG-13] ⢠Unsuitable for children under 13. 3 [PG] ⢠P arental Guidance suggested. 2 [G] ⢠General Audience . 1 [Kid Safe] ⢠Suitable for children. Rating Lev el All 8 [Adult] 7 [NC-17] 6 [R] 5 [PGR] 4 [PG-13] 3 [PG] 2 [G] New PIN
57 SETUPS EN EN Set up network connection setti ngs in order to use BD-Live, DLNA home med ia server, Netflix / CinemaNow / Bl ockbuster / VUDU or n etwork upgrade functio n. After you enable a network connection or change the network settings, always perform the connection test to check if the connection is correctly made. 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSettingsâ in the home menu, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNetwork ConnectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂConnection TestâÂÂ, then press [OK]. Connection test will start automatically and the test result will appear right after the connection test finishes. ⢠â T esting... â : The test is in progr ess. ⢠âÂÂP assâ : Co nnection test is succ essfully complet ed. ⢠âÂÂF ailâ : Connection test failed. Check the connection settings. If the connection test passes, press [OK] . ⢠Confirmation screen of the network selection will ap pear . e.g.) Wired connection Press [OK] again to display the confirmation screen of network settings. 4) Press [OK] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Select âÂÂWired Connectionâ if you made a wired connection and set the setting to â StandardâÂÂ(wired ) or âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired), in accordance with your network environment. Standard (Wired) Network settings are set to th e follo wing sett ings initially. (In most cases, you can connect to the Internet without making any changes to the default settings.) If you want to set t he network settings back to the defaul t settings as above (except âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ), follow the procedure below. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂCo nnectio n Testâ on p age 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNetwork SelectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use[ K / L ] to select âÂÂWired ConnectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂStandardâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The unit will start the connection test automatically . ⢠If the connec tion test passes, press [OK] to go back to the home menu. ⢠If the connec tion test fails, press [OK] to go back t o the previous screen. Please verify your settings and try again. Network Connection home A âÂÂSettings â A âÂÂNetwork Connecti onâ Connection Test Network Selection Wired then press 'OK'. xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gate way Primar y DNS Secondary DNS then press 'OK'. Note ⢠If the conn ection test pas ses, you are ready to use BD-Live, DLNA home media ser ver , Netfli x / CinemaNow / Blockbuster / VUDU or network upgrade function, using the Internet without making any a dditional setti ngs. ⢠If the conn ection test fa ils, you may need to change the MA C address settings on your rout er . Y ou can check the MAC addr ess of this unit on âÂÂNetwork Statusâ screen (ref er to page 60). ⢠When connecting this unit directly to a modem for the first time or connecting it to a modem which was previously connected to any other network device(e.g . a router , PC, etc.), you ma y have to power cycle the modem to reset the settings on the modem. Wired Connection - IP Address Setting Auto(DH CP) - DNS Setti ng Auto(DHCP) - Proxy Setting Do Not Use - Connection Sp eed Auto - BD-Live Settin g Allow Note ⢠The setting of âÂÂBD-Live Setting â will not be set back to the default, even if you f ollow the procedure. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
58 SETUPS EN Manual (Wired) In following cases, select âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired ) to set each setting as necessary. - When connec tion test failed with the setting of âÂÂStandardâÂÂ(wired). - When instructed by your Inte rnet service provider to make specific settings in accordance with your network environment. To set the network set ting to âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired), foll ow the following procedure. 1) Follow steps 1) to 3) in âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂManualâÂÂ, then press [OK]. - Setting menu of âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wired) will be displayed. Set each setting as necessary. IP Address Setting / DNS Setting 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂIP Address SettingâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. If you select âÂÂManualâÂÂ, follow the following instruction to set the IP address and DNS. 2-a) IP address set ting screen will appear. Enter I P address, subnet mask and default gateway with cursor button s and number buttons. ⢠Enter the IP address number af ter checking the specifications of your router . ⢠If the IP address is unknown, check the IP address of other devices . (e.g. PC connected via LAN cable) and assign a d ifferent number from those of other devices. After you enter all correctly, press [OK] to go to the DNS setting screen. 2-b) DNS setting screen will appear. Enter primary DNS and secondary DNS with cursor buttons and number buttons. ⢠Enter the DNS addresses pro vided by your Internet provider . ⢠If the DNS address is unknown, check the DNS address of other devices (e .g. PC connected via LAN cable) and assign the same DNS address. 2-c) After you enter all correctly, press [OK] . ⢠Confirmation message will appear . Selec t âÂÂY esâ to complete the settings. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. âÂÂAuto(DHCP)â : If your router has DHCP server function, select âÂÂAuto(DHCP)âÂÂ. âÂÂManualâ : If your router does not have DHCP server function, select âÂÂManualâÂÂ. IP Address Setting IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gate way Clear OK Note ⢠The range of input numbers is between 0 and 255. ⢠If you enter a number larger than 255, the number will automatically be 255. ⢠The manually entered addresses will be saved even if you change the setting to â Auto(DHCP)â . ⢠When you enter a wrong number , press [Red ] to cancel. (the number will be back to âÂÂ0âÂÂ.) ⢠If you want to ent er 1 or 2 digit number in one cell, press [ B] to move on to t he next cell. ⢠If the entered IP add ress or the default gateway or primary DNS address is same as the default setting, IP address setting will be set to â Auto(DHCP)âÂÂ. ( The manually entered number will be saved). ⢠When IP address setting is s et to âÂÂManual âÂÂ, the setting of DNS setting will automatically be âÂÂManualâ and when IP address setting is set to â Auto(DHCP)âÂÂ, you can set either â Auto(DHCP)â or âÂÂManual â for DNS setting. DNS Setting Primar y DNS Secondary DNS Clear OK xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gate way Primar y DNS Secondary DNS Is Setting OK? Ye s No
59 SETUPS EN EN Proxy Setting 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂProxy SettingâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. ⢠F or default setting s, select âÂÂDo Not UseâÂÂ. ⢠If you need to change the proxy sett ing as instructed by your Internet service provider to set the designat ed proxy addr ess and port, select âÂÂUse âÂÂ. If you select âÂÂUseâÂÂ, follow the following instructions to set the proxy address and proxy port. 2-a) Proxy address setting screen will appear. Enter proxy address. ⢠Th e k e ybo ard s cree n wi ll ap pe ar. After you enter all correctly, press [Yellow] to go to the proxy port setting screen. 2-b) Enter proxy port number with number buttons. 2-c) After you enter all correctly, Press [Yellow] . ⢠Confirmation message will appear . S elect â Y esâ to complet e the settings. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Connection Speed You can set connection speed as your preference. (The default setting is âÂÂAut oâÂÂ.) 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂConnection SpeedâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct the desired setting, then press [OK]. âÂÂAutoâÂÂ: Set the appropriate connection speed automatically, in accordance with your network environment. âÂÂ10BASE HalfâÂÂ: Set the connection spe ed to âÂÂ10BASE HalfâÂÂ. âÂÂ10BASE FullâÂÂ: Set the connection spe ed to âÂÂ10BASE FullâÂÂ. âÂÂ100BASE HalfâÂÂ: Set the connection spee d to âÂÂ100BASE HalfâÂÂ. âÂÂ100BASE FullâÂÂ: Set the connection spee d to âÂÂ100BASE FullâÂÂ. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. [ K / L / s / B] : Move the highligh t. [the Number buttons] : Enter number. [OK] : Enter the highlighted number / word. * [Red] : C lear the en tered number or word. [Green] : Clear all the entered numbers or words. [Blue] : Switch betw een abc, ABC and @!? * [Yellow] : Set the en tered number or wor d. * These buttons can be used in other network settings. 1 a k u 2 b l v 3 c m w 4 d n x 5 e o y 6 f p z 7 g q . 8 h r - 9 i s _ 0 j t OK xxxxxxxx_ Proxy Setting Proxy Address Clear All Clear OK a/A/@ x Proxy Setting Proxy P or t Clear OK xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx Proxy Address Proxy P or t Is Setting OK? Ye s No Note ⢠The range of input numbers for the port number is between 0 and 65535. (If you enter a number larger than 65535, it will be regarded as 65535.) ⢠For pr oxy por t, cer tain por ts might be closed, blocked or unusable depending on your network environment. Note ⢠Choo se a con nec tion s peed i n accordan ce with your network environment. ⢠The network connection may be disabled depending on the device, when the settings are changed . Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
60 SETUPS EN BD-Live Setting You can limit Internet access for BD-Live discs. (The default setting is âÂÂAllowâÂÂ.) 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. âÂÂAllowâÂÂ: Internet access is permitted for all BD-Live contents. âÂÂLimited AllowâÂÂ: Internet access is permitted only for BD-Live contents which have content owner certificates. Internet access without the certificates is prohibited. âÂÂProhibitâÂÂ: Internet access is prohibit ed for all BD-Live contents. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Network Status You can check the sta tus of network settings. 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂNetwork StatusâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Network setting list will be displayed. ⢠MA C address of th is unit will be displ ayed in the list . 2) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. If you connect this unit to the network wirelessly, select âÂÂWireless Connectionâ and set up necessary settings. Wireless Router In order to use a wireless network, you m ust set up the connection to the wireless router. Find wireless network Search for wireless networks automatically and select the wireless network name (SSID) from the list. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂWireless ConnectionâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂWireless RouterâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂFind wireless networkâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠This unit will star t searching for wireless networks automatically . 5) The list of wireless networks will be displayed. Use [ K / L ] to select the appropriate wireless network name (SSID), then press [OK]. 6) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct the authentication setting of the selected wireless network. ⢠F or a wireless network with authentication setting, select the authentication setting , according to the security t ype of the wireless network . ⢠F or a wireless network without authentication setting , select âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. âÂÂNoneâÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂNoneâÂÂ. âÂÂWEPâÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂWEPâÂÂ. âÂÂWPA-PSK (TKIP)âÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂWPA-P SK (TKIP)âÂÂ. âÂÂWPA-PSK (AES)âÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂWPA-P SK (AES)âÂÂ. âÂÂWPA2-PSK (TKIP)âÂÂ: Set the authentication setting to âÂÂW PA2-PSK (TKIP)âÂÂ. âÂÂWPA2-PSK (AES)âÂÂ: Set the authentication sett ing to âÂÂWPA2-PSK (AES)âÂÂ. ⢠If you select â WEPâÂÂ, â WP A-PSK ( TKIP)âÂÂ, â WP A-PSK (AES)âÂÂ, âÂÂWP A2-PSK ( TKIP)â or â WP A2-PSK (AES)âÂÂ, âÂÂWEP/ WP A K ey â entry screen will ap pear . Enter the WEP/WP A key of the selec ted wireless network u sing cursor button s, number butt ons and color key , then press [Yellow] . ⢠Confirmation message will appear. Select âÂÂY esâ to complete the setti ngs. Wireless Connection Settings | ... | Wireless Router Find wireless network AP1 None WEP WP A-PSK (TKIP) WP A2-PSK (TKIP) WP A2-PSK (AES) WP A-PSK (AES) AP2 AP3 AP4 AP5 AP6 AP7 AP8 Page Down WEP/WP A Authentication 1 a k u 2 b l v 3 c m w 4 d n x 5 e o y 6 f p z 7 g q . 8 h r - 9 i s _ 0 j t OK a/A/@ WEP/WP A Authentication WEP/WP A K ey Clear All Clear OK SSID AP1 WP A2-PSK (AES) Is Setting OK? Ye s No xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx... WEP/WP A Authentication WEP/WP A K ey
61 SETUPS EN EN 7) Following screen will appear. Use [ s / B ] to select "Yes", then press [OK] to go to âÂÂAdvanced SettingsâÂÂ. ⢠F or furt her operation, ref er to â Advanced Settingsâ on page 61. ⢠T o go back to the home menu, press [( h o m e ) ] . Manually enter your SSID Set up the connection to the wireless rou ter manually by entering the wireless network name (SSID). 1) Follow steps 1) to 3) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂManually enter your SSIDâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Wireless Router Name (SSID) entr y screen will appear . Enter the wireless network name (SSID) using curso r buttons, number buttons and color key , then press [Yellow] . 3) Follow steps 6) to 7) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. Wireless Router Status You can check the current status of âÂÂWireless Routerâ setting. 1) Follow steps 1) to 3) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂWireless Router StatusâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The list of current wireless router setting will be display ed. 3) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Advanced Settings After you set up th e âÂÂWireless Routerâ setting, set the network setting to âÂÂStandardâ (wireless) or âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wireless). Standard (wireless) To set the network setting to âÂÂStandardâÂÂ(wirel ess), follow the following proced ure. For details of this se tting, refer to âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâ in step 7) of âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61, skip to step 3). 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂFind wirel ess networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂAdvanced SettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂStandardâÂÂ, then press [OK]. Manual (wireless) To set the network setting to âÂÂManualâÂÂ(wirele ss), follow the following procedure. ⢠If you select âÂÂYesâ in step 7) of âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61, skip to step 3). 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂFind wireless networkâ on pages 60-61. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂAdvanced SettingsâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂManualâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠For details of each setting, ref er to following pages. âÂÂIP Address Settingâ / âÂÂDNS SettingâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂIP Address Setting / DNS Settingâ on page 58. âÂÂProxy SettingâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂProxy Settingâ on page 59. âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂBD-Live Settingâ on page 60. âÂÂNetwork StatusâÂÂ: Refer to âÂÂNetwork Statusâ on page 60. Deactivates all the netw ork connection and settin gs. 1) Follow steps 1) to 2) in âÂÂStandard (Wired)â on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂDisableâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Note ⢠F or a wireless net work with authentication setting , key icon appears to the right hand of the wireless network n ame (SSID). ⢠Signal icon shows the strength of the signal. ⢠WEP/WP A key app ears as asterisks on the confirmation screen. ⢠The internal Wireless LAN supports following specifications. - Wireless standards : IEEE 802.11 b/g/n - Frequency spectrum : 2.4GHz - Security protocol : WEP / WPA / WPA2 Network Connection Wireless router settings are incomplete. Please use "Advanced Settings" to complete your setup. Yes No 1 a k u 2 b l v 3 c m w 4 d n x 5 e o y 6 f p z 7 g q . 8 h r - 9 i s _ 0 j t OK a/A/@ Manually enter your SSID Wireless Router Name (SSID) Clear All Clear OK Note ⢠Y ou cannot select â Advanced Settingsâ if âÂÂWireless Router â setting is not completed. Disable Note ⢠The network connection can be reactivated by setting the network connection t o â Wired C onnec tionâ or âÂÂWireless C onnect ion âÂÂ. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
62 SETUPS EN This unit supports Philips Ea syLink, which enables your TV (limited to PHILIPS brand EasyLink TV) to act in conjunction with this unit, or vice versa. Compliant TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT jack. When âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CEC)â setting is set to âÂÂOnâÂÂ, functions listed below will be available. One Touch Play When the operations with following buttons of the remote control of th is unit are performed, the TV will automatically be turned on and switched to the appropriate input channel. Buttons for one touch play: - [ B (play)] , [ S (previous)] , [ T (next)] , [the Number buttons] , [( h o m e ) ] , or [INFO ] - [TOP MENU] , or [DISC MENU / POP-UP MENU] (when a disc is inserted in the unit) Standby When you press and hold [ Q (standby/on)] for 2 seconds, it turns off the power of the TV first and then turns off the power of this unit also. System Information Get & Set Menu Language The unit recognizes the OSD language set for the TV and automatically sets the same language as the player menu language (OSD menu language) for this unit. Refer to the âÂÂPlayer Menu â on pa ge 45 for available languag es. ⢠This feature is av ailabl e only when â Auto â is selec ted in the âÂÂPlayer Menu â in the settings menu. Philips continuously tries to improve its products and we strongly recommend that you upgrade the software when upgrades are available. New software can be down loaded from our web site at www.philips.com using the type number of your Blu-ray Disc P layer (e.g. BDP7520) to find information. You can upgrade the software by using disc. 1) Follow st ep 1) in âÂÂConnection Testâ on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂOthersâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSoftware UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂDisc UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 5) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 6) Disc tray will open automatically. ⢠Inser t th e disc for softwa re upgrade and then press [ A (open/close)] . 7) After completing load ing disc, confirmation message will appear. Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂYesâ and press [OK] to start upgrading. ⢠It may take a while to complete the upgrad ing. 8) After the disc upgrade finishes, this unit will restart and open the disc tray au tomatically. Remove the disc. You can upgrade the software by connecting the unit to the Internet. 1) Follow st ep 1) in âÂÂConne ction Testâ on page 57. 2) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂOthersâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSoftware UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 4) Use [ K / L ] to sel ect âÂÂNetwork UpgradeâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 5) Use [ K / L ] to sele ct âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠This unit will then star t checki ng for the latest software version. 6) Confirmation message will appear. Use [ s / B ] to select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠The unit will star t downloading the latest software versio n. 7) When the download co mpletes, confirmation message will appear. Press [OK]. ⢠The unit will star t upgrading the software version. ⢠It may take a while to complete the upgrad ing. 8) After upgrading finishes, this unit will restart and open the disc tray automatically. EasyLink (HDMI CEC) home A âÂÂS ettingsâ A âÂÂOthersâ A âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CEC)â Software Upgrade home A âÂÂSet tingsâ A âÂÂOthersâ A âÂÂSoftware Upgradeâ Disc Upgrade Note ⢠Please visit ww w .philips.com to download the latest software version. Please read the software upgrade Read-me file carefully befo re per forming an upg rade using a disc. ⢠Please do not unplug the AC power cord while executing the âÂÂDisc Upgrade âÂÂ. ⢠All settings will remain the same even if you upgrade the software version. ⢠The version of Netflix will also be upg raded if newer version of Netflix is available when upg rading the softwar e. Network Upgrade Note ⢠In order to upgrade the software via th e Internet, you must connect the unit to the Internet an d set up necessar y settings. ⢠For the network connection, refer to â Connection to the Networkâ on page 20. ⢠For the network setup , refer to âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ on page 57. ⢠Please do not unplug the A C power cor d or LAN cable while executing the âÂÂNetwork Upgrade âÂÂ. ⢠All settings will remain the same even if you upgrade the software version. ⢠The disc tray will open automatically af ter upgrading finishes. This is not a malfunction. ⢠The version of Netflix will also be upg raded if newer version of Netflix is available when upg rading the softwar e.
63 SETUPS EN EN Menus to reset player settin gs, format SD card, local storage, clear network settings and deactivate Netflix or VUDU. 1) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂSettingsâ in the home menu, then press [OK]. 2) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂFactory DefaultâÂÂ, then press [OK]. 3) Use [ K / L ] to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ: All the settings except for the âÂÂRatings Lockâ and âÂÂNetwork Connectionâ setting will be reset to default. âÂÂFormat SD Cardâ (Available only when an SD Memory Card is inserted): Initialize the SD Memory Card. âÂÂLocal StorageâÂÂ: Local storage for Player or SD card (Available only when an SD Memory Card is inserted) used for BD-Java will be initialized. âÂÂNetwork SettingsâÂÂ: Reset the network settin g to the default . âÂÂNetflix DeactivateâÂÂ: Deactivates the connection to Netflix. âÂÂVudu DeactivateâÂÂ: Deactivates the connectio n to VUDU. 4) Use [ K / L ] to select âÂÂYesâÂÂ, then press [OK]. ⢠Confirmation message will appear . Press [OK] to complete the setting. 5) Press [BACK U ] to go back to the previous screen, or press [ (home)] to go back to the home menu. Reset to Factory Default home A âÂÂSettingsâ A âÂÂFactory Defaultâ Note ⢠Do not remove the SD Memory Card while ex ecuting the âÂÂFormat SD Cardâ or âÂÂLocal Storage â (SD card). It will damage the card. ⢠âÂÂF ormat SD Card â and âÂÂLocal Storageâ (SD card) ar e not available when a Blu-ray Disc is in the unit. Introducti on Connections Basic Setup Playbac k Others Function Setup
EN 64 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Tip POWER No reaction to the remote control. Connect the product to the power outlet. Point the remote control at the product. Insert the batteries correctly. Insert new batteries in the remote control. No video signal on the display device. Turn on the TV. Set the TV to the correct external input. Select the correct video resolution using [HDMI] . Press and hold [ B (play)] on th e front panel for 5 seconds to change the setting back to its default. No audio / video signal on the display device via HDMI cable. If the unit is connected to the una uth orized display device with an HDMI cable, the audio / video signa l may not be output. Perform an HDMI cable hotplug, wherein y ou disconnect the HDMI cable from the TV and this unit and then reconnect it to both the devices while they are powered on. Ensure that your HDMI cable is certified . No high-definition video signal on the TV. Does the disc contain high-definition video? High-definition video is not available when the disc does not contain it. Does the TV support high-definition video? High-definition video is not available when the TV does not support it. No 3D video on the TV . Check if your TV is 3D capable. Use HDMI 1.4 cable to co nnect the 3D capable TV. Set âÂÂ3D Outputâ to âÂÂAuto (XX)âÂÂ. (Refer to page 45.) Wear 3D glasses and make sure they are switched on and in sync with your TV. Check the battery level s of your glasses. Refer to your 3D TV 's user manual for more information. No audio signal from the loudspeakers of the TV. Assign the audio input of the TV to the corresponding video input. Ensure that the TV's speakers are turned on in the TV menu. Ensure that the TV speakers are not muted. No audio signal from the loudspeakers of the audio system. Turn on the audio system. Set the audio system to the correct external input. Increase the volume level of the audio system. GENERAL Cannot play back a disc. Make sure that the product supports the dis c. Check the region code of the disc. This unit sup ports following region codes. -BD : âÂÂAâ -DVD : âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ1â for BDP7520/F7 (U SA / Canada) âÂÂALLâ or âÂÂ4â for BDP7520/F8 (Mexico) For DVD-RW/-R, make sure that the disc is finalized. Clean the disc. SD Memory Card cannot be read. The format of the card do es not match t hat accepted by this unit or the card is not compatible. Cannot play back JPEG files from a disc. Make sure that the disc was recorded in the UDF, ISO9660 or JOLIET format. Cannot play back MP3 files from a disc. Make sure that the disc was recorded in the UDF, ISO9660 or JOLIET format. Make sure that the bit rate of the MP3 files is between 112 and 320 kbps. Make sure that the s ample rate of the MP3 files is 32 kH z, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Cannot play back Windows Media⢠Audio files from a disc. Make sure that the sample rate of the Windows Media⢠Audio files is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. Cannot play back DivXî files from a disc. Make sure that the file extension is .avi, .AVI, .divx or .DIVX. Ensure that the DivXî video on th e disc meets the DivXî p layback capabilities of this device outlined on page 27.
65 TROUBLESHOOTING EN EN Problem Tip GENERAL in the upper right hand corner of the TV screen. The operation is not possible. Buttons do not work or the unit stops responding. To completely reset the unit, press and hold [ Q (standby/on)] on the fro nt panel for 10 seconds to shut down the unit or unplu g the AC cord from the AC outlet for 5-10 seconds. Cannot find a JPEG file. Make sure that the select ed group (folder) does not contain more tha n 9,999 files for BD / DVD / SD card, and 999 f iles for CD. Make sure that the file extensio n is .jpg, .JPG, .jpeg or .JPEG . Cannot find an MP3 and Windows Media⢠Audio file. Make sure that the selected folder does not contain more tha n 9,999 files for BD / DVD / SD card, and 999 files for CD. Make sure that the file extension is .mp3 or .MP3 for M P3, and .wma or .WMA for Windows Media⢠Audio. Error message appears when I select â Auto â in the âÂÂPlayer MenuâÂÂ. Make sure that the unit is connected to the PHILIPS brand EasyLink TV an d the âÂÂEasyLink (HDMI CE C)â is set to âÂÂOnâÂÂ. This error message may appear when your TVâÂÂs OSD language is not supported by this unit. Cannot connect to the network. Check if the network connection is properly made. Turn on the modem or router. Check the network settings. Check if the router and/or modem is correctly connected. Check the âÂÂBD-Live SettingâÂÂ. When connecting directly to a modem via a LAN cable, you might need to power cycle the modem to reset sett ings on the modem. Cannot use the wireless connection. Once you ha ve acti vated th e wirel ess connect ion pl ease wait 30 seconds for the conne ction to be establish ed after turning on th e unit, before tryin g to access network features such as BD -Live, DLNA, Netflix, CinemaNow, Blockbuster or VUDU. Cannot get into the PC's screen after âÂÂMediaConnectâ is selected. The startup screen (PHILIPS logo with spinning circle) keep displaying until the unit found the PC that is ru nni ng Philips Wi reless Media Connect. Make sure if the network connection is connected prop erly. Check if your PC runs Philips Wireless MediaConnect. Make sure your TV and PC are connected on the same network. Cannot connect to the n etwork while my PC is connected to the network. Check the content of your Internet serv ice contract to see if your Internet Service Provider prevents multiple terminals connecting at the same time. The capacity of the SD card decreased. Data may be written to the SD card when a BD-video that supports the virtual package is used and an SD card is in the slot. MPEG-2 video and audio on t he SD card cannot be played back. MPEG-2 is noncompliant on this unit. The contents of the card cannot be read. The card is not compatible or the co ntents on the card may be damaged. Turn off and then turn the unit on again. Cannot use the BD-Live function or download of data does not perform properly. Insert an SD card with enough capacity(1GB or more). Check if an SD card is correctly inserted. Make sure the write-protect switch on the SD card is not enabled. Cannot play back BD-video(BD- ROM Profile 2.0). Insert an SD card(1GB or more) which is formatted on this unit. Some discs with BD-Live function re quire memory when playing back the content. Do not remove the card during playback. Make sure the write-protect switch on the SD card is not enabled. Folder or files stored on DLNA home media server are not displayed in the file list or cannot be played back. Check the setting on your home media server. (Refer to the user manual of the home media server.) Check the network connection and settings. Cannot use Netflix fe ature. Netflix is av ailable only in the United States. Check if the network connection is properly made. Visit netflix.com/Philips on your PC and become a Netflix member. Cannot add movies or TV episodes to the instant Queue. Visit netflix.com on your PC. Adding movies or TV episodes on this unit is not available. Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
66 TROUBLESHOOTING EN To obtain an el ectronic copy of this manual : 1) Point your browser to www.philips.com/suppo rt. 2) Choose your country of location. 3) Enter the model number or a keyword in the âÂÂFind your pr oductâ field. Alternatively, you can browse the catalog. 4) Click the description or model. 5) Under Product support, clic k âÂÂUser manualsâ . If you cannot resolve your problem, refer to the FAQ for this Blu-ray Disc Player at www.philips.com/support . If the problem remains unresolved, contact th e Customer Support Center in your country. Problem Tip GENERAL Even though the speed of the Internet connection improves during playback, the picture quality of Netflix streaming movie does not improve. The picture quality does not change during playback. The picture quality differs depending on the speed of Internet connection at the time of loading. The picture quality of streaming movie (Netflix, CinemaNow or Blockbuster) is poor. Check the speed of your Internet connection. Streaming movie (Netflix, CinemaNow or Blockbuster) often stops or start buffering during playback. Contact your Internet service provider. (You may need to improve the broadband speed.) Cannot use CinemaNo w / Blockbuster feature. Check if the network connection is properly made. Visit www.cinemanow.com/Login (C in e ma N ow ) or www.blockbuster.com/auth/login (Blockbuster) on your PC and create an account. Cannot use the VUDU service. Check if the network connection is properly made. Cannot rent or buy movies / TV shows on VUDU. You need to activate the VUDU account. (Refer to page 43) Log into your accoun t at http://my.vudu.com and check your payment information. The picture quality of VUDU movie is poor. Check the speed of your Internet connection. You need speeds of at least 8 Mbps to this player for high quality uninterrupted playback. VUDU movie often stops or starts buffering during playback. Contact your Internet service provider to troubleshoot your I nternet connection for speed and line q uality. Consistent line quality an d speed are very important for Internet video playback. Downloading an Electronic Copy Contact Us Note ⢠Do not attempt to repair the Blu-ray Disc Player y ourself. This ma y cause severe injury , irreparable damage to your Blu-ray Disc Pl ayer or void y our warranty . ⢠Please have available your Blu-ra y Disc Player model and serial number before contacting us. These numbers are available on the cabinet, as w ell as on the pack aging.
67 EN EN GLOSSARY Analog Audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also âÂÂDigital AudioâÂÂ. Aspect Ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the TV screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the TV screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). AVCHD AVCHD is a new format for high definition video camcorders which can record and p lay high-resolution HD images. BD-Live BD-Live is a BD-video (BD-ROM version 2 Pro file 2.0) which contains new functions (e.g. Internet connection), in addition to the BONUSVIEW funct ion. Blockbuster Blockbuster is online service which you can rent or purchase movies and TV episodes streamed over the Internet. Blu-ray Disc (BD) Blu-ray Disc is a next generation optical video disc which is capable of storing much more data than a conventional DVD. The large capacity makes it possible to benefit from the features such as high-definition videos, multi-channel surround sounds, interactive menus and so on. Chapter Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on a BD-video or DVD-video is usually divided into chapters. See also âÂÂTitleâÂÂ. CinemaNow CinemaNow is online service which you can rent or purchase movies and TV episodes streamed over the Internet. Component Video Output Each signa l of lumi na nce (Y) and component (P B /CB , P R /CR ) is independent to output so that yo u can experience picture color as it is. Also, due to compatibility wi th progressive video (525p/ 480p), you can experience higher-density picture than that in interlace (525i/480i). Digital Audio An indirect representation of sound by nu mbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audi o) by an anal og-to- digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also âÂÂSampling Frequencyâ and âÂÂAnalog AudioâÂÂ. DivXî DivXî is a codec (compression/decompression) that can compress pictures to a very small amount of data. The software can compress video data from almost any devices to the size that can be sent on the Internet without compromising visual quality of the pictures. DLNA (Digital Living Network Al liance) DLNA is a cross-industry organization of consumer electronics that formulates DLNA Interoperability Guidelines for sharing digital contents within a home network. DNS Server A server which translates Internet domain names into IP addresses. Dolby Digital The system to compress digital sound developed by Dolby Laboratories. It offers you s ound of stereo (2ch) or multi- channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is the ne xt generation digital audio compression technology developed as an extension to Dolby Digital. Blu-ray Disc supports 7.1 multi-channel surround sound outp ut. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a lossless coding technology developed for next generation optical discs. Blu-ray Disc supports 7.1 multi-chan nel surround sound outp ut. DTSî (Digital Theater System) DTSî is a multi channel su rround sound system. You can enjoy movie dynamic and realistic sound like movie theater. DTS surround sound technologies were developed by DTS, Inc. DTS-HDî DTS-HDî is a lossless coding technology developed as an extension of the original DT S Coherent Acoustics format. Blu-ray Disc supports 7.1 multi-channel surround sound output. Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
68 GLOSSARY EN Gateway IP address of the electronic devices (such as router) which provide Internet access. HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) A digital interface between audio and video source. It can transmit component video, audio, and control signal with one cable connection. Hub A device used for connecting multiple device to the network. IP Address A set of numbers which are assigned to devices participating in a computer network. JPEG (Joint Photogra phic Ex perts Group) JPEG is a method of compressin g still picture files. You can copy JPEG files on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R or SD Memory Card from a computer and play back the files on this unit. LAN (Local Area Network) A group of computer networks covering a small area like a company, school or home. Local Storage A storage area of sub contents for playing virtual packages on BD-video. MP3 (MPEG audio la yer 3) MP3 is a method of compressing files. You can copy MP3 files on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R or SD Memory Card from the computer and play back t he files on this unit. Netflix Netflix is online movie rental service, offering online streaming to customers in the United States. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CD and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amplifiers wit h digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPE G audio to PCM. See also âÂÂDigital AudioâÂÂ. Proxy Server Proxy server is a server which acts as an intermediary between a workstation user an d the Internet to ensure security. Region Code Regions associate discs and players w ith particular areas of the world. This unit will only play back discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). Router A networking device which distinguishes the IP address assigned to each device and routing and forwarding information in the computer network. Sampling Frequency The rate which sound is measur ed by a specified interval to turn into digital audio data. The nu mbers of sampling in one second defines as sampling frequency. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality. Subnet Mask A mask which is used to determine what subnet an IP address belongs to. Title A collection of chapters on BD-video or DVD-video. See also âÂÂChapterâÂÂ. Track Audio CD uses tracks to divide up the content of a disc. The BD-video or DVD-video equi valent is called a chapter. See also âÂÂChap terâÂÂ. Virtual Package The function which copies data to other media (local storage) from the Internet and plays secondary video, secondary audio and subtitles at the same time. The method of the playback varies depending on discs. VUDU VUDU is a leading HD on-demand video service which utilizes the Internet connection to deliver the highest quality on-demand video and Internet applications. Windows Media⢠Audio Windows Media⢠Audio is the audio compressing technology developed by Microsoft. You can copy Windows Media⢠Audio files on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R or SD Memory Card from a comput er and play them back on this unit. x.v.Color âÂÂx.v.Colorâ is a promotion name given to the products that have the capability to realize a wide color space based on the xvYCC specifications and is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
69 EN EN SPECIFICATIONS General Signal System NTSC Color Power requirements 120 V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption 17 W (standby: 0.5 W) Dimensions (width x height x depth) 17.2 x 2.0 x 8.5 inches (435 x 50 x 215 mm) Weight 4.6 lbs. (2.1 kg) Operating temperature 41ðF (5ðC) to 104ðF (40ðC) Operating humidity Less than 80 % (no condensation) Terminals Front SD card slot slot x 1 Rear Audio output (Anal og) RCA jack x 2 L/R: 2 Vrms (out put impeda nce: more than 1k ⦠) Video output RCA jack x 1 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠) Component vi deo output RCA jack x 3 Y: 1 Vp-p (75 ⦠)P B /CB : 700 mVp-p (75 ⦠)P R /CR : 700 mVp-p (75 ⦠) Audio output (Digital) RCA jack x 1 500 mVp-p (75 ⦠) HDMI output HDMI jack x 1 Video: 480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 1080p24/Audio LAN terminal 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX Wireless LAN (Internal) IEEE 802.11 b/g/n Note ⢠The specifications and design of this pr oduct are subje c t to ch ange without not ice. Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
EN 70 NETWORK SERVICE DISCLAIMER Network Service Disclaimer Content and services made av ailable through this product are transmitted by third par ties by means of networks and transmission facilities o ver which Compan y has no control and third party ser vices may be terminated or interrupted at an y time, and Compan y makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain av ailable for an y period of time. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer , Company expressly disclaims an y responsibility for any int erruption or suspension of any cont ent or ser vice made available thr ough this product. Compan y is not responsible for cust omer ser vice related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the cont ent or ser vices should be made directly to the respective content and service providers. THIRD P ART Y CONTENT AND SERVICES MADE A V AILABLE THROUGH THIS PRODUCT ARE PROVIDED â AS IS.â C OMP ANY DOES NO T W ARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED , FOR ANY PURPOSE WHA TSOEVER. C OMP ANY EXPRESSL Y DISCLAIMS ANY W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCL UDING WITHOUT LIMIT A TION, W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILIT Y OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE , ACCURA CY , V ALIDIT Y , TIMELINESS, LEGALIT Y , SUIT ABILIT Y , OR QU ALIT Y OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE A V AILABLE THROUGH THIS PRODUCT . IN NO EVENT SHALL COMP ANY BE LIABLE FOR, ANY DAMAGES, WHETHER ARISING IN C ONTRACT OR TORT , INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMIT A TION, ANY DIRECT , INDIRECT , INCIDENT AL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, L OST PROFITS, A T TORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY O THER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF , OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY CONTENT (OR ANY INFORMA TION CONT AINED THEREIN) OR SER VICE PROVIDED TO THE USER OR ANY THIRD P ART Y , E VEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILIT Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. All content and services accessible through this product belong to third parties and are protected by c opyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellec tual propert y rights. Such content and services are provided solely f or the User â s personal noncommercial use . User may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the cont ent owner or ser vice provider . Without limiting the foregoing , unless expressly authorized by the applicable cont ent owner or ser vice provider , you ma y not modify , copy , republish, upload , post, transmit, translate , sell, create deriv ative works , exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium an y content or ser vices made av ailable through this product.
71 EN EN IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY IN FORMATION FOR 3D TELEVISIONS Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup Ambient fluorescent lighting ma y cause a flickering effec t and direct sunlight may adv ersely affect the operation of your 3D glasses. 1. Read the following inf ormation before viewing 3D television images . DO NO T place your television near open stairwells, balconies or other objects as viewing in 3D images may cause disorientation f or some viewers resulting in falls, tripping or walking into objec ts. 2. If you experience (1) alter ed vision; (2) lightheadedness; (3) dizziness; (4) inv oluntar y movements such as ey e or muscle twitching; (5) confusion; (6) nausea; (7) loss of awareness; (8) convulsions; (9) cramps; and/or (10) disorientation, immediately stop watching 3D images and consult y our doc tor . 3. P arents should regularly monitor their children c oncerning the above symptoms as children and teenagers ma y be more likely to experience these symptoms more frequently than adults. W atching 3D television is not recommended f or children under the age of 6 as their visual system is not yet fully dev eloped. 4. Pr olonged viewing of 3D images might cause discomfort, dizziness, eye strain, headaches or disorientation. 5. CA UTION NO TICE: Some viewers may experienc e an epileptic seizure or stroke when exposed to certain flashing images or lights contained in cer tain television pictures or video games. If you or any of y our family has a histor y of epilepsy or stroke, please consult your doctor bef ore viewing 3D images. 1. DO NO T watch 3D television if you are pr egnant, elderly , sleep-deprived , suffering from serious medical conditions , in poor physical c ondition or under the influence of alcohol. 2. Sitting too close to the screen f or an extended period of time may damage your eyesight. The ideal distance should be at least three times the height of the T V screen and at the viewer's eyes lev el. 3. W earing the 3D glasses for an y reason other than viewing 3D television (as general spectacles, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.) ma y physically harm you or w eaken your eyesight. 4. If you experience an y discomfort while viewing 3D images, stop and do not immediately engage in any pot entially hazardous activit y such as driving a car until your symptoms ha ve disappeared . If your symptoms persist, do not resume watching 3D images without consulting y our doc tor . 5. W ARNING NOTICE:
EN 72 ONE (1) YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY WARRANTY COVERAGE: This warranty obligation is limited to the terms set forth below. WHO IS COVERED: Th i s product is warranted to the original purchaser or the per- son receiving the product as a gift against defects in materials and workmanship as based on the date of original purchase (âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ) from an Authorized Dealer. The original sales receipt showing the product name and the purchase date from an authorized retailer is considered such proof. WHAT IS COVERED: This warranty covers new products if a defect in material or workmanship occurs and a valid claim is received within the Warranty Period. At its option, the company will either (1) repair the product at no charge, using new or refurbished replacement parts, or (2) exchange the product with a product that is new or which has been manufactured from new, or ser- viceable used parts and is at least functionally equivalent or most comparable to the original product in current inventory, or (3) refund the original purchase price of the product. The Company warrants replacement products or parts provided under this warranty against defects in materials and workmanship from the date of the replacement or repair for ninety (90) days or for the remaining portion of the original productâÂÂs warranty, whichever provides longer coverage for you. When a product or part is exchanged, any replacement item becomes your property and the replaced item becomes the companyâÂÂs property. When a refund is given, your product becomes the companyâÂÂs property. Note: Any product sold and identified as refurbished or renewed carries a ninety (90) day limited warranty. Replacement product can only be sent if all warranty requirements are met. Failure to follow all requirements can result in delay. WHAT IS NOT COVERED - EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS: This Limited Warranty applies only to the new products that can be identified by the trademark, trade name, or logo affixed to it. This Limited Warranty does not apply to any non-Philips hardware product or any software, even if packaged or sold with the product. Non-Philips manufacturers, suppliers, or publishers may provide a separate warranty for their own products packaged with the bundled product. The Company is not liable for any damage to or loss of any programs, data, or other information stored on any media contained within the product, or any non-Philips product or part not covered by this warranty. Recovery or reinstallation of programs, data or other information is not covered under this Limited Warranty. This warranty does not apply (a) to damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, neglect, misapplication, or non-Philips product, (b) to damage caused by service performed by anyone other than an Authorized Service Location, (c) to a product or a part that has been modified without written permission, or (d) if any serial number has been removed or defaced, or (e) product, accessories or consumables sold âÂÂAS ISâ without warranty of any kind by including refurbished Philips product sold âÂÂAS ISâ by some retailers. This Limited Warranty does not cover: ⢠Shipping charges to return defective product. ⢠Labor charges for installation or setup of the product, adjust- ment of customer controls on the product, and installation or repair of antenna/signal source systems outside of the product. ⢠Product repair and/or part replacement because of improper installation or maintenance, connections to improper voltage supply, power line surge, lightning damage, retained images or screen markings resulting from viewing fixed stationary con- tent for extended periods, product cosmetic appearance items due to normal wear and tear, unauthorized repair or other cause not within the control of the company. ⢠Damage or claims for products not being available for use, or for lost data or lost software. ⢠Damage from mishandled shipments or transit accidents when returning product. ⢠A product that requires modification or adaptation to enable it to operate in any country other than the country for which it was designed, manufactured, approved and/or authorized, or repair of products damaged by these modifications. ⢠A product used for commercial or institutional purposes (including but not limited to rental purposes). ⢠Product lost in shipment and no signature verification receipt can be provided. ⢠Failure to operate per OwnerâÂÂs Manual. TO OBTAIN ASSISTANCE IN THE U.S.A., CANADA, PUERTO RICO, OR U.S. VIRGIN ISLANDS... Contact Customer Care Center at: 1-866-309-0866 This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state/province to state/province. P&F USA, Inc. PO Box 430 Daleville, IN 47334-0430 WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR THE CON- SUMER. PHILIPS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDEN- TAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY ON THIS PROD- UCT. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY. Some states do not allow the exclusions or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
73 EN EN MEMO Introduction Connec tions Basic Setup Playback Others Functio n Setup
Meet Philips at the Internet http://www.philips.com/welcome P&F USA, Inc. PO Box 430 Daleville, IN 47334-0430 IMPORTADOR: Sojitz Mexicana, S.A. de C.V. Av. Paseo de las Palmas no. 239-302 Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, c.p. 11000 México, D.F. 52 (55) 5202 - 7222 P&F Mexicana, S.A. de C.V. Av. La Palma No. 6, Col. San Fernando La Herradura, Huixquilucan Edo. de México C.P. 52787 EXPORTADOR : FUNAI ELECTRIC CO. L.T.D. PaÃÂs de Origen : CHINA Comercializado por : P&F Mexicana, S.A. DE C.V. LEA CUIDADOSAMENTE ESTE INSTRUCTIVO GARANTIA INCLUIDA EN EL INSTRUCTIVO DE USO ANTES DE USAR SU APARATO. ENERGIA BDP7520 120 V ~ 60 Hz 17 W Printed in China JpnYN-1043/F7-3 1VMN30256A â â â â E5VK6UD Philips and Philips Shield are used under license of K oninklijke Philips Electronics N.V .